JP2021013844A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of satisfactorily performing display control.SOLUTION: When displaying a bone display character, a display CPU 131 calculates coordinate data of each bone data of the bone display character by using a coordinate arithmetic area provided in a work RAM 132. In performing the calculation of the coordinate data, after performing an initial setting of the coordinate arithmetic area, the coordinate data of bone data included in one skeleton data is calculated, and when calculating coordinate data of bone data included in other skeleton data, an initial setting of the coordinate arithmetic area is performed again. In that case, bone data corresponding to a plurality of aggregate unit characters are consolidated and set in aggregation skeleton data, the coordinate data calculation of each bone data included in the aggregation skeleton data is performed after an initial setting of the coordinate arithmetic area is performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 41

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-261415

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suitably performing display control.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above problems includes a display means having a display unit and a display means.
A display control means for displaying an image on the display unit using the generated data generated by the data generation means, and
With
The data generation means includes information deriving means for deriving control information used for generating the generated data.
The information derivation means is
Pre-derivation setting means that sets the derivation storage means to the pre-derivative state,
A derivation execution means for deriving the control information by using the derivation storage means set in the pre-derivation state,
With
The setting to the pre-derivation state by the pre-derivation setting means is a configuration that can be executed a plurality of times to generate the generated data at the update timing of one image.
The derivation executing means is the control corresponding to a plurality of types of individual images after the pre-deriving state is set by the pre-deriving setting means and before the pre-deriving state is newly set. It is characterized in that it is provided with a plurality of correspondence derivation means for deriving information.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably perform display control.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of the symbol display apparatus (a)-(j). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of the symbol display apparatus (a), (b). It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning or failing lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command correspondence processing which is executed in the sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the control pattern table. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the command transmitted from the sound light side MPU to the display CPU 72. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content instructed by each command data. It is a flowchart which shows the command selection process executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing executed by a display CPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing executed by the display CPU, and (b) is explanatory drawing for explaining the command storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the command correspondence processing executed by the display CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the reference table. It is a flowchart which shows the task processing which is executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display side command correspondence processing which is executed in the sound light side MPU. It is a time chart which shows how the pointer information of the execution target table is adjusted in relation to the task processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a)-(c) drawing list. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process which is executed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a)-(c) color change effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a) the data structure of the memory module for executing a color change effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for demonstrating the color palette. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the color change effect executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the color change effect executed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the writing process for the color change effect executed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a)-(e) effect effect. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for effect effect executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for effect effect execution executed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the writing process for effect effect execution which is executed in VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a)-(e) development production. It is a time chart which shows how the development effect is executed using the image data for each effect. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for development effect executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for development effect executed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a) simultaneous display effect, (b) explanatory diagram for demonstrating the data structure for executing simultaneous display effect, and (c) displaying the effect image at the time of increase. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image data for this. It is a time chart which shows how the image data for a normal effect and the image data for a simple effect are properly used as the image data for displaying the effect image at the time of increase. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for simultaneous display effect executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for simultaneous display effect executed by VDP. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the task processing which is executed by the display CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a)-(c) drawing list. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process which is executed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how drawing data is created with execution of drawing processing. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a), (b) loop effect. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure for executing a loop effect, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the compounding table. It is a time chart showing how a loop effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for a loop effect executed by a display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the interpolation display period processing executed by a display CPU. It is a time chart which shows the timing which the derivation of the coordinate data by a combination is started for A character for loop effect and B character for loop effect. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for a loop effect executed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for determining the first start target. It is a flowchart which shows the interpolation display period processing executed by a display CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the contents of (a), (b) bone model display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure for performing a bone model display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a) skeleton data, and (b) is explanatory diagram for demonstrating the coordinate calculation area. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the bone model display effect executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the coordinate calculation processing executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the bone model display effect executed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (a), (b) a set character group. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the skeleton data of each set unit character. It is explanatory drawing for comparing each data amount of (a)-(c) bone display character and set unit character. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the bone animation data for a set. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operation content of each set unit character (a), (b). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a), (b) plane shadow display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure necessary for performing a plane shadow display. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for plane shadow display executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for plane shadow display executed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of another form of (a), (b) plane shadow display. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for plane shadow display executed by the display CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a) step shadow display, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure necessary for performing step shadow display. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the step shadow display executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the step shadow display executed by VDP. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the variable display effect, and (b) is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the area used when executing the variable display effect in the expansion buffer of VRAM. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for the variation display effect executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the variation display effect executed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing data creation process for the variation display effect executed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drawing data of the symbol display part saved in each storage buffer (a) to (c). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the drawing data of the variable display effect image is created by using the drawing data saved in each storage buffer (a) to (e). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of (a), (b) distortion background display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image data for performing (a)-(c) distortion background display. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for distortion background display executed by the display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for distortion background display executed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the refraction application processing executed by VDP.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

The game machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. It has a function of locking the door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

A game board 24 is mounted on the inner frame 13. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the guiding means is provided by the inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26. The guide rail is configured as. The game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism (not shown) attached to the lower part of the game board 24 in the inner frame 13 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail. The game ball launch mechanism performs a game ball launch operation by manually operating the launch operation device 28 provided on the front door frame 14.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a normal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing.

Even if the ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when the number of prize balls enters the first operating port 33 or when the balls enter the second operating port 34, three prize balls are paid out. , When a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the special electric winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. Will be executed.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in the second operating port 34 may be smaller than that in the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 is the first operating port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that does not enter various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PA through the out opening 24a. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 24b are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the flow of the game area PA is continued without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out port 24a, the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 The entry of a game ball into the game is also referred to as a prize.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are opened upward. Further, both operating ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operating port 33 faces upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric accessory 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the general electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the prize in the second operating port 34, and when the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the prize can be won in the second operating port 34.

A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball from the second operating port 34. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball winning the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning the prize. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second operating port 34.

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the through gate 35, and a normal map display of the normal map unit 38 provided in the lower right corner, which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. The variable display of the pattern is performed in the part 38a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the winning of the electric service opening, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the general map display unit 38a is completed, the state shifts to the general electric opening state. In the open state of the general electric power, the general electric accessory 34a is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

The cathode ray display unit 38a is composed of a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device and an organic EL display device are used. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix display devices. In addition, as the pattern that is variablely displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, or A configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal drawing unit 38, a normal drawing holding display unit 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal drawing display unit 38a. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the through gate 35 is reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the general drawing reservation display unit 38b.

A winning lottery is performed triggered by winning a prize in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Then, the lottery result is clarified through the display effect on the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

More specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a. The display area of the special figure display unit 37a is narrower than the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display unit 37a, a winning lottery is performed triggered by a prize in the first operating port 33 or a winning in the second operating port 34, so that a variable display of the pattern or a predetermined display is performed. Then, the result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The special figure display unit 37a is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device and an organic EL display device are used. , CRT or other types of display devices such as dot matrix display devices. Further, as the pattern displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are displayed. Can be considered.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure holding display unit 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display unit 37a. The number of winning game balls in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display unit 37b.

Regarding the symbol display device 41 In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and is a dot matrix display device. You may.

In the symbol display device 41, when the special symbol display unit 37a performs a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, the symbol is displayed accordingly. A variable display or a predetermined display is performed. That is, when the special figure display unit 37a performs the variable display, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display accordingly. Then, for example, in a game round in which the game result is a big hit result, the symbol display device 41 stops and displays a predetermined combination of symbols on a preset effective line.

The display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing individual symbols that are variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display surface P of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIGS. 3 (a) to 3 (j), a design which is a kind of design consists of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9" and a shell-shaped design. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as an octopus are assigned numbers "1" to "9" to form a main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set as a plurality of display areas. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. .. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display surface P, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 4B, on the display surface P, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has become like. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display surface P. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state where a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on one of the effective lines. When the variation display of ~ Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variation jackpot result described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) correspond to "specific symbols" and even numbers (2,4,5,6,8) are assigned. The main symbol corresponds to a "non-specific symbol". When the 15R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the same combination of specific symbols or the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, when a normal jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result described later, the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed, and then, An explicit video is displayed.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. Further, the pattern to be variablely displayed by the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned symbol, and for example, only numbers may be variablely displayed as the symbol.

Further, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 33 and 34, the variation display is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display is stopped. Is equivalent to one game.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 2, if a big hit is won in the winning lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34, the special electric winning device 32 can be won. Shift to open / close execution mode. The special electric winning device 32 includes a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and also includes an opening / closing door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening / closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and is switched to an open state in which the game ball can win a prize when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is won in the internal lottery. It has become. By the way, the open / close execution mode is a mode in which the transition is made when a hit result is obtained. It should be noted that, although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured in a state in which it is more difficult to generate a prize than in the open state. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the display effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode is executed by the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13 having the game board 24 having the above configuration. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 so that almost the entire area of the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 43 is fitted therein. The window panel 43 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but is not limited to this, and may be formed colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the game area PA is formed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 43. It may be colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

A display light emitting unit 44 is provided above the window unit 42. Further, a pair of left and right speaker units 45 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided. Further, below the window portion 42, an upper bulging portion 46 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 47 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 46a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 47a has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 46a.

A main control device, a voice emission control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13. Further, the back pack unit 15 is equipped with a payout mechanism unit including a payout device, a payout control device, and a power supply / emission control device. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 includes a main control board 51 that controls the main control of the game. In the main control device 50, the substrate box accommodating the main control board 51 and the like is provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening, or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening is provided. It may be. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are inseparably bonded together, and a joint portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion at the time of separation thereof is formed, or an adhesive layer is peeled off and adhered to an adhesive layer. It is conceivable that a sealing sticker that leaves a trace of being peeled off by remaining on the case is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box can be considered.

The MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51. The MPU 52 is a ROM 53 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 52, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed. A RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in.

As the ROM 53, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require an external power supply for storage retention is used. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 53 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. Further, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be mounted as separate chips. It may be installed.

The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power supply / emission control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power supply / launch control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, the operating power is supplied to the main control board 51 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. By the way, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and the display control device 70 described later.

A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power supply / emission control device 57. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed, a power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 52, so that the MPU 52 executes a process for a power failure. It becomes possible to do.

Further, various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As a part of the various sensors, detection provided on a one-to-one basis for winning balls such as a general winning opening 31, a special electric winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, and a through gate 35. A sensor is included, and the MPU 52 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion. Further, in the MPU 52, a big hit generation lottery and a big hit result type lottery are executed based on the winnings in the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34, and a reach generation lottery for each game and a lottery for determining the display continuation period are executed. To do.

Here, a configuration for performing various lottery in the MPU 52 will be described.

The MPU 52 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit generation lottery, a setting of the display of the special figure display unit 37a, a setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, a setting of the display of the normal figure display unit 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot generation lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type such as the probability variation jackpot result and the normal jackpot result, and the symbol. Reach occurrence when the display device 41 deviates and fluctuates The reach random number counter C3 used for lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41. A fluctuation type counter CS that determines the fluctuation display time is used. Further, the general electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is set to the electric service open state is used. Each of these counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is provided in the lottery counter buffer 54a.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is a reserved storage area 54b as an acquisition information storage means when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Stored in.

The hold storage area 54b includes a hold area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and is used in the winning history of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. At the same time, each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

In the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first holding area RE1 → the second holding area RE2 → Each numerical information is stored in the order of the third reserved area RE3 → the fourth reserved area RE4 in chronological order. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 can be held and stored. .. The number that can be stored on hold is not limited to 4, and may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, or may be a single number. The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display unit 37a, and at the start of one game round. Is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

More specifically, the hit random number counter C1 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the hold storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored in the ROM 53 as a winning / failing table. As the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as the lottery mode in the winning / losing lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the big hit is 20. If the winning probability of the high probability mode is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plurality of jackpot results are (1) an mode of opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) a third after the opening / closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing differences in the three conditions of the support mode in the general electric accessory 34a of the two operating ports 34.

As an mode of opening / closing control of the special electric winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high and low. Frequent winning mode and low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the large winning opening is opened and closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 30 seconds have passed or the winning opening is won. It continues until the number reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the large winning opening is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings in the large winning opening. Continues until there are six.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launch mechanism 58 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. To. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, as described above, the opening time of one large winning opening is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the open / close execution mode related to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

In the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the number of times the large winning opening is opened and closed, the opening time limit for one opening, and the number of opening limits for one opening are higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. However, as long as the frequency of winning the special electric winning device 32 increases from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. Specifically, if the high-frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time limit for one opening is long, or the number of opening limits for one opening is set to be large. Good.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is not substantially won in the opening / closing execution mode related to the low-frequency winning mode. It is good to have a configuration. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening time limit for one opening, while in the low frequency winning mode, one opening is set. The product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number may be set longer than the opening limit time. In addition, even if the firing interval of the game ball and the opening time of one large winning opening are not as described above, in the low frequency winning mode, the latter is set to be shorter than the former, so that the latter is substantially shorter. Therefore, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a prize is not generated in the special electric winning device 32.

As a support mode in the universal power accessory 34a of the second operating port 34, when compared in a situation where the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area, the general electric power of the second operating port 34 A low-frequency support mode and a high-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency with which the accessory 34a is opened per unit time is relatively high or low.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery using the general electric accessory release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). ), But in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the general electric accessory 34a is opened when the electric service open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and once more. The opening time of is set long. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric service open state is won and the open state of the general electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, a shorter time as the minimum secured time for the next electric accessory opening lottery to be held after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Is set to be selected.

As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the second operating port 34 is won is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operating port 33 is higher than that of the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than the first operating port 33. The probability that a prize will be given to the mouth 34 increases. Then, when a prize is won in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls held so much. It can be carried out.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the high-frequency support mode to be in the electric service open state per unit time is not limited to the above, for example, the electric accessory open lottery. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric service open state in. In addition, the secured time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed (for example, on the general map display unit 38a based on the winning of the through gate 35). In a configuration in which multiple types of variable display times to be executed) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a shorter reservation time is more easily selected or the average reservation time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. You may be. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured for the next electric accessory opening lottery after one electric accessory opening lottery is performed is shortened (that is,). , Shorten the one-time variable display time on the general map display unit 38a), shorten the average time of the secured time, and increase the winning probability, and apply any one condition or any combination of conditions. Therefore, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be enhanced.

The distribution destination of the game result with respect to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 53 as a distribution table. Then, as the distribution destination, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a 15R probability variation jackpot result are set.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the normal jackpot state.

The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. .. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state.

The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the winning / losing lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the winning / losing lottery becomes a big hit state and the state shifts to the big hit state. In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the 15R probability variation jackpot state.

In relation to each of the above game states, the normal game state means a state in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and "10 to 14" corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result. The "15-29" corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

As described above, since the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is set as the probability variation jackpot result, the mode of the probability variation jackpot result is diversified. That is, when comparing the two types of probability variation jackpot results, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high frequency winning mode in the open / close execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the support mode, is the highest, and the opening / closing execution is executed. In the mode, the low frequency winning mode is set, but in the support mode, the high frequency support mode is set, and the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is the lowest. As a result, the monotonousness of the game can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In addition, as a kind of probability change jackpot result, the open / close execution mode becomes the low frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. The unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result may be included. In this case, the probabilistic jackpot results will be further diversified.

Furthermore, as a kind of the winning / failing result in the winning / failing lottery, a special losing result that shifts to the open / close execution mode of the low frequency winning mode and does not cause the transition to the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode after the end may be included. .. In the configuration in which both the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special deviation result are set as described above, the open / close execution mode shifts to the low frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. On the other hand, when the transition mode of the winning / failing lottery mode is different, for example, when either the unspecified 2R probability variation jackpot result or the special deviation result occurs in the normal game state, it is determined. It is possible to make the player predict which result actually corresponds to.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect is that the symbol display device 41 capable of displaying the fluctuation of the symbol is provided, and the stop display result after the fluctuation display is specially displayed in the game times in which the opening / closing execution mode of the special electric winning device 32 is the high frequency winning mode. In the resulting game machine, the player is made to think that the special display result is likely to be the variable display state before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is started. Display state for.

Two types of expected effects are set: the above-mentioned reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of a reach display or a special display result in a stage before the reach display occurs.

In the reach display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of a high-frequency winning mode is performed by stopping and displaying some of the symbol rows among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. Includes a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may hold is displayed, and in that state, a variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol sequence. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background image to produce a reach effect. , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface P to perform a reach effect.

Regarding the reach display related to the variable display of the symbol, specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of the symbol, a high frequency winning mode is generated on a preset effective line in the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may form a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is displayed by the final stop symbol sequence. Is to do.

To specifically explain the display contents of FIG. 4, one of the valid states is obtained when the variable display of the symbol is first completed in the upper symbol row Z1 and then the variable display of the symbol is completed in the lower symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol variation is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. It becomes a reach display by being told. Then, when the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The variable display of the symbol is finished.

In the notice display, after the variable display of the symbol is started on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, or in some symbol rows. In the situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. In addition, the background image has a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur in any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. Further, in the game round that does not shift to the open / close execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display by referring to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53. Executed if there is. On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to display the notice is not performed by the main control device 50, but by the voice emission control device 60.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 52 to determine the variation display time on the special symbol display unit 37a and the variation display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the timer interrupt process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the main process described later. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the variation display on the special symbol display unit 37a and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. When determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 53 is referred to.

The general electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to, for example, add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, reach the maximum value, and then return to "0". The general electric service opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 54c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the utility accessory 34a to the open state according to the value of the stored utility accessory opening counter C4.

A payout control device 55 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and a power supply / emission control device 57 is also connected. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 55, for example, based on the winning determination result for the winning ball unit corresponding to the winning. The payout control device 55 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 56 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 50. A launch permission command is transmitted to the power supply / launch control device 57 based on the fact that the launch control device 28 is being operated. The power supply / launch control device 57 drives the game ball launch mechanism 58 to launch the game ball toward the game area based on the launch permission command received from the main control device 50.

Further, a special figure display unit 37a and a normal figure display unit 38a are connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and the display control of the special figure display unit 37a and the normal figure display unit 38a is directly performed by the MPU 52. That is, at each game round, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a is executed in the MPU 52. Further, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is clearly indicated, the display control of the general drawing display unit 38a is executed in the MPU 52.

On the output side of the MPU 52, a special electric winning drive unit that opens and closes the opening / closing door of the special electric winning device 32 and a general electric accessory driving unit that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 are connected. .. That is, in the open / close execution mode, the drive control of the special electric winning drive unit is executed in the MPU 52 so that the large winning opening is opened and closed. Further, when the open state of the utility accessory 34a is won, the drive control of the utility accessory drive unit is executed in the MPU 52 so that the utility accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, a voice emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and various commands for effect are transmitted to the voice emission control device 60.

Here, the processing executed by the MPU 52 will be described. The processing of the MPU 52 is roughly classified into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main process. In step S101, the power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined time for waiting (specifically, 1 sec) elapses after the main process is started. During the execution period of the power-on wait process, the operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed. In the following step S102, access to the RAM 54 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 52 is set.

After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch provided in the power supply / firing control device 57 is manually operated, and in the following step S105, whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 54. Is determined. Further, in step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in the following step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. judge.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality of the data stored and held by the checksum is confirmed, the process proceeds to step S108 in the same manner. In step S108, the RAM 54 is cleared. After that, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch is not pressed, step S109 is performed without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, the power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 54 such as the initialization of the power failure flag is set as an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60 in order to recognize the current gaming state. To do.

After that, the process proceeds to the residual processing of steps S110 to S113. That is, although the MPU 52 has a configuration in which timer interrupt processing is periodically executed, a residual time is generated between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This residual time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, and the residual process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed by utilizing the irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the residual processing in steps S110 to S113 is an irregular process that is executed irregularly.

In the residual processing, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S111, the random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S112, the variation counter update process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the RAM 54, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S113, the interrupt enable setting for switching from the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is permitted is set. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the process of steps S110 to S113 is repeated.

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, in a 4 msec cycle). First, the power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board, and if the occurrence of a power failure is identified, the power failure processing is executed.

In the following step S202, the lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information was sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the universal utility release counter C4, and the read numerical information was added by 1 to each of them. Later, a process of overwriting the read source counter is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0" respectively. After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the fluctuation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

In the following step S205, fraud detection processing for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, "1" is set in the game stop flag provided in the RAM 54 by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred.

In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not "1" is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, the port output process is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, the process for outputting the output corresponding to the output information to various drive units is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special electric winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric winning driving unit is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set, the said Stop the output of the drive signal. Further, when the information for switching the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general electric accessory drive unit is started and the information for switching to the closed state is started. If is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

In the following step S208, the reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the following step S209, the winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, the signal received from each winning detection sensor is read, and whether or not the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are won. Execute the process to identify.

In the following step S210, a timer update process for collectively updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 54 is executed. In this case, the timer counters whose stored numerical information is subtracted and updated are aggregated and handled, but both the subtraction type timer counter update and the addition type timer counter update are aggregated. It may be configured.

In the following step S211, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In a situation where the firing operation to the launching operation device 28 is continued, one game ball is launched every 0.6 sec, which is a predetermined firing cycle, as described above.

In the following step S212, as the input state monitoring process, the disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor and the opening confirmation of the game machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading process of step S208.

In the following step S213, the special figure special electric control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the special figure special electric control process, when a prize is generated in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 in a situation where the number of reserved information stored in the holding storage area 54b is less than the upper limit number, the prize is generated. A process of sequentially storing each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the time point in the hold storage area 54b is executed as hold information. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, it is determined whether or not the hold information corresponds to the jackpot winning on the condition that the hold information is stored and not during the game rotation or the open / close execution mode. The processing and, if it corresponds to the jackpot winning, the distribution determination processing for determining which jackpot result the pending information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, not only the hit / fail judgment process and the distribution judgment process, but also whether or not the hold information corresponds to the reach occurrence when the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot winning. Along with executing the reach determination process for determination, a process for selecting the duration of the game round is executed using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time. In this case, the fluctuation display time table corresponding to the presence / absence of the jackpot winning, the jackpot type, and the presence / absence of the reach is read from the ROM 53, and the read fluctuation display time table and the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that timing are used for this time. Determine the duration of the game. Then, the variation command including the information on the duration of the determined game times and the type command including the information on the game result are transmitted to the voice emission control device 60, and the variation display of the pattern on the special figure display unit 37a. To start. As a result, one game round is started, and the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41 start the effect for the game round.

Further, in the special figure special electric control process, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the game round during the execution of one game round, and if it is the end timing, the display corresponding to the game result is performed. , Execute the process of ending the game. In this case, a final stop command indicating that the game round should be ended is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the result of the game round corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the process for starting the open / close execution mode is executed. At the time of this start, an opening command indicating that the open / close execution mode is started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. At each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60, and a closing command indicating that the round game is completed is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, an ending command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is terminated is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60, and a winning / failing lottery mode or a support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set. Execute the process.

After executing the special figure special electric control process of step S213 in the timer interrupt process, the normal figure general electric control process is executed in step S214. In the Fuzu Fuden control process, when a prize has been won in the through gate 35, a process for acquiring the hold information on the Fuzu side is executed, and the hold information on the Fuzu side is stored. In addition, a release determination is made for the held information, and a process for performing an effect for a general drawing is executed with the release determination as an opportunity. Further, based on the result of the opening determination, a process of opening and closing the general electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is executed.

In the following step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease in the number of reserved information related to the special figure display unit 37a on the special figure hold display unit 37b is set. , Set the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the normal figure display unit 38a on the normal figure hold display unit 38b. Further, in step S215, the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, and the display content of the normal figure display unit 38a is set. Set the output information to be updated.

In the following step S216, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 55 are confirmed, and the payout state reception process for performing the process corresponding to the check result is executed. Further, in step S217, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed. In the following step S218, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the timer interrupt process this time is executed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Voice emission control device 60>
Next, the voice emission control device 60 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 5, the voice emission control device 60 includes a voice emission control board 61 on which the MPU 62 is mounted. The MPU 62 is a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 62, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A certain RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in.

As the ROM 63, a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require an external power supply for storage retention is used. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. Further, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be mounted as separate chips. It may be installed.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main control device 50 is connected to the input side of the MPU 62, and the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62. Further, a display CPU 72 described later of the display control device 70 is connected to both the input side and the output side of the MPU 62. That is, the MPU 62 is connected to the display CPU 72 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and commands are exchanged between the MPU 62 and the display CPU 72 by bidirectional communication. The two-way communication is performed by serial communication, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be performed by parallel communication.

The MPU 62 recognizes that it is necessary to start the effect for the game round by receiving the variation command transmitted from the main control device 50, and executes the game round effect start process. Further, by receiving the end command transmitted from the main control device 50, it recognizes that it is necessary to end the effect for the game round, and executes the effect end process for the game round. Further, by receiving various commands for the jackpot effect transmitted from the main control device 50, it is recognized that the jackpot effect needs to be started or progressed, and the jackpot effect process is executed.

Note that receiving a command from the main control device 50 in the MPU 62 is not limited to a configuration in which the command is directly received from the main control device 50, but also includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay board is received.

In the game turn effect start process, based on both the change command and the type command, the change display time grasp process for grasping the change display time of the corresponding game turn and the reach display grasp process for grasping the presence / absence of reach display. And, the process of grasping the occurrence of the jackpot result for grasping the presence or absence of the jackpot result, and the process of grasping the jackpot type for grasping the jackpot type when the jackpot result occurs are executed. Further, based on the grasp results in the reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process, and the jackpot type grasping process, the symbol that determines the type of the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 in this game round. Execute the type grasping process. Then, based on the results of each of the above grasping processes, the display control device issues a variation pattern command including information on the variation display time and information on the type of display effect, and a symbol designation command including information on the type of symbol to be finally stopped and displayed. Send to 70.

Further, in the game rounding effect start process, in addition to the above-mentioned grasping processes, a notice display lottery process for whether or not to display a notice is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type lottery of the notice display is also executed. Then, if the notice display is won, a notice command including information on the type of the notice display is transmitted to the display control device 70.

Further, in the game rotation effect start processing, the display light emitting table for the game rotation and the voice table for the game rotation are read from the ROM 63 based on the processing results of each of the above processes. The display light emitting table for the game round defines the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 44 in the progress process of the corresponding game round. In addition, the audio table for the game round defines the output mode from the speaker unit 45 in the progress process of the game round.

In the game round production end process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the voice output control of the speaker unit 45 in the current game round are ended. Further, in the game rotation effect end process, an end command including information for ending the game rotation effect is transmitted to the display control device 70.

In the jackpot production process, based on the various commands for jackpot production received, the production mode such as at the opening, each round, between each round, and at the ending is grasped, and the jackpot production corresponding to the grasped result is used. Command is transmitted to the display control device 70. Further, based on the grasping result, the display light emitting table for the jackpot effect and the audio table for the jackpot effect are read from the ROM 63, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 45 during the jackpot effect. To specify.

<Display control device 70>
Next, the display control device 70 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 5, the display control device 70 includes a display control board 71 on which a display CPU 72, a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, a VRAM 75, and a video display processor (VDP) 76 are mounted. ..

The display CPU 72 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 70, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program or the like. Specifically, the display CPU 72 is connected to the input port 77 mounted on the display control board 71 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the voice emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 72 through the input port 77. Will be done. Note that receiving a command from the voice emission control device 60 in the display CPU 72 is not limited to a configuration in which the command is directly received from the voice emission control device 60, and includes a configuration in which the command relayed to the relay board is received. Is done.

The display CPU 72 is connected to the work RAM 73, the memory module 74, and the VRAM 75 via a bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on a command received from the voice emission control device 60. Give a transfer instruction. Further, the display CPU 72 is connected to the VDP 76 via a bus, and gives a drawing instruction to output an image signal to the symbol display device 41 based on a command received from the voice emission control device 60. Hereinafter, the memory module 74, the work RAM 73, the VRAM 75, and the VDP 76 will be described.

The memory module 74 stores control data including a control program and fixed value data in advance, and also includes sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 41, background data, moving image data, and the like. It is a storage means that stores various image data in advance. The memory module 74 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require an external power supply for storage retention. By the way, the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is performed well. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is used, the memory module 74 is used as a non-writing and read-only memory (ROM).

Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outline and pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color of the bitmap image at each pixel. There is. Further, the background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in which the still image data is compressed. The moving image data will be described in detail later.

The work RAM 73 is a storage means for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 74, and for temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 73 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storage, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. The storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the work RAM 73 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74. Then, the display CPU 72 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 73 into the internal memory area (register group) as needed, and executes various processes.

The VRAM 75 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 75 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires power supply from the outside for storage, and in detail, SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. The storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the VRAM 75 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 75 includes an expansion buffer 81, and image data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 76 to the memory module 74. Further, the VRAM 75 is provided with a frame buffer 82 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 76. The VRAM 75 may be built in the VDP 76.

The VDP 76 is an image generation device that draws on the symbol display device 41 by specifically processing the data stored and held in the expansion buffer 81 based on the drawing instruction from the display CPU 72. This is a kind of drawing circuit that operates an image processing device 41b incorporated so as to drive and control a liquid crystal display unit 41a in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP76 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing.

Specifically, the VDP 76 includes a control unit 91, a register 92, a moving image decoder 93, and a display circuit 94. Further, these circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to the I / F95 for the display CPU 72 and the I / F96 for the VRAM75.

In the VDP 76, the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 72 is stored in the register 92. When the drawing list is stored in the register 92, the control unit 91 starts a program according to the drawing list and executes a predetermined process. In addition, all the control programs for operating the control unit 91 may be provided by the drawing list, and a memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the control unit 91, and the contents of the control program and the drawing list are combined. The control unit 91 may be configured to execute a predetermined process. Further, the control program may be read in advance from the memory module 74.

As the above process, the control unit 91 reads the image data stored in the memory module 74 into the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Further, the control unit 91 creates drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 82 using (or by processing) the image data read out in the expansion buffer 81. The drawing data for one frame is the data required to display the image at one update timing in the configuration in which the image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

Here, the frame buffer 82 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 82a and 82b. Specifically, a first frame region 82a and a second frame region 82b are provided. Each of these frame areas 82a and 82b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 82a and 82b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, a full-color method is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) at each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each RGB color in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

The method is not limited to the full-color method. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed at each dot, the storage capacity required for storing color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 82 is provided with the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b, in a situation where drawing is executed on the symbol display device 41 using the drawing data created in one frame area. , Creation of drawing data to be used in the future is executed for other frame areas. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 82.

In the display circuit 94, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 82a or the second frame area 82b, and the image signal is transmitted to the display circuit 94. It is output to the symbol display device 41 via the connected output port 78. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the output target frame areas 82a and 82b to the display circuit 94. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by adjusting the resolution with a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 41. Then, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output based on the gradation data. A synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal is also output from the display circuit 94. Further, the moving image decoder 93 decodes the moving image data transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75.

<Processing configuration of MPU 62 of voice emission control device 60>
Next, the process executed by the MPU 62 of the voice emission control device 60 (hereinafter referred to as the sound light side MPU 62) will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed in a sound light side MPU 62 with a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

First, in step S301, the main command correspondence process for performing the process corresponding to the command received from the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 (hereinafter referred to as the main MPU 52) is executed. In the following step S302, a command selection process for instructing the display CPU 72 of the content of the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed.

After that, in step S303, a light emission control process for controlling the light emission of the display light emitting unit 44 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is performed according to the control pattern table read in the main command corresponding process in step S301. Further, in step S304, a sound output control process for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 45 is executed. In the sound output control process, the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed according to the control pattern table read in the main command corresponding process in step S301. After that, the pointer update process is executed in step S305. In the pointer update process, the pointer information of the current control pattern table is updated to the next pointer information. Further, in step S306, the display-side command-corresponding process for performing the process corresponding to the command received from the display CPU 72 is executed.

<Main command correspondence processing>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a main command corresponding process executed in step S301 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

When the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 52 (step S401: YES), the game result storage process is executed (step S402). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, information on which is the result of the winning / failing lottery and the sorting lottery determined by the main MPU 52 at the start of this game round is specified, and the information thereof is specified. The specified information is written to the RAM 64.

In the following step S403, the advance notice lottery process is executed. In the advance notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display the advance notice on the symbol display device 41 in this game round. As such a notice display, as described above, in a situation where the symbol is variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the symbol display device 41 starts the variable display of the symbol, or a part of the notice display. In a situation where the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol rows in the symbol row, the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the background screen is the previous mode. Also includes those having different predetermined modes and those in which the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have different predetermined modes from the previous modes. The notice display can occur in both the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the case where the reach display is performed is higher than the case where the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. Further, in the advance notice lottery process, the advance notice display is more likely to occur in the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in the game times corresponding to the missed result, and the advance notice display having a lower appearance rate is more likely to occur. A notice lottery will be held.

In the following step S404, the stop symbol determination process is executed. In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game round is either a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variation jackpot result, it corresponds to a stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5. The information is determined as the information of the result of this stop. In this case, the same odd-numbered symbol combination may be selected in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot result, while the same even-numbered symbol combination may be selected in both the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result. The effective lines L1 to L5 in which the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, even if it is a normal jackpot result, the same odd-numbered symbol combination may be selected.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game round is an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, the stop result is such that the same symbol combination is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and one effective line L1. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of specific symbols (“3.4.1”) is established on ~ L5 is determined as the information of the stop result this time. In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of this game time is out of order, the presence / absence of reach display is specified from the content of the change command. Then, when the reach display occurs, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the specific symbols are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and it is on the one or two effective lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the reach symbols is established is determined as the information of the stop result this time. On the other hand, when the reach display does not occur, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the specific symbols are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the reach is reached on all the effective lines L1 to L5. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of symbols is not established is determined as the information of the stop result this time.

In the following step S405, a process for determining the effect pattern of the current game times is executed. In the process, the information on the duration of the game is specified from the content of the variable command received this time, the information on the duration, the information on the game result specified in step S402, and the notice in step S403. An effect pattern corresponding to the combination of the lottery result information of the lottery process and the stop result information determined in step S404 is selected. When selecting this effect pattern, the pattern determination table provided in the ROM 63 is referred to, and the information on the duration, the game result, the lottery result of the advance notice lottery process, and the stop result are obtained. The address of the control pattern table corresponding to the information in the ROM 63 is specified, and the control pattern table is read from the ROM 63 and written to the RAM 64 based on the identification result of the address.

The control pattern table will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 11 is an example of a control pattern table that can be selected when a 15R probability variation jackpot result is obtained.

As shown in FIG. 11, pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the duration of the target game is set in the control pattern table, and the information on the content of the task and the information on the content of the task are set in correspondence with each pointer information. Information on the presence / absence of command output and information on additional data are set.

The task content information is information set to perform light emission control and sound output control corresponding to this game, and information that does not reflect the task content information at all is not set as additional data. As long as it is limited, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is performed and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed in an manner corresponding to the information of the content of the task in each frame.

Specifically, regarding the control pattern table shown in FIG. 11, the pointer information of "0" is set with the data at the start of fluctuation, and the pointer information of "200" is set with the data at the start of the advance notice effect. The pointer information of "300" is set with the data at the end of the advance notice effect, the pointer information of "400" is set with the data at the start of normal reach, and the pointer information of "700" is set with the data at the start of super reach. The data is set, the pointer information of "1000" is set with the data at the start of the final effect, and the pointer information of "1400" is set with the data at the end of the fluctuation. Each of these pointer information corresponds to a delimiter timing such as the start of the effect, the switching of the effect, and the end of the effect. In addition, data for enabling light emission control and sound output control between break timings are set in the pointer information other than these.

The information on the presence / absence of command output is information indicating the presence / absence of command output from the sound / light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 and the type of the command. By outputting the command to the display CPU 72 according to the control pattern table, it is possible to associate the content of the image in the symbol display device 41, the content of light emission in the display light emitting unit 44, and the content of sound output in the speaker unit 45. .. That is, according to the content of the moving image in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 44 executes the light effect, and the speaker unit 45 executes the sound output effect.

Specifically, regarding the control pattern table shown in FIG. 11, command data is set for the pointer information of "0" in which the data at the start of fluctuation is set in the task content. Therefore, at the start of the fluctuation of the game times, the display control is started in the display CPU 72 based on the command transmission from the sound / light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72. In addition, in the content of the task, each pointer information in which the data at the start of the advance notice effect, the data at the start of the normal reach, the data at the start of the super reach, the data at the start of the final effect, and the data at the end of the fluctuation are set. Specifically, command data is set for each pointer information of "200", "400", "700", "1000", and "1400". Therefore, within the range of the effect for the game round that is started by the occurrence of the predetermined start trigger that the variable command and the type command are transmitted from the main MPU 52, the effect category included in the effect for the game round is included. When the type changes, the display CPU 72 starts the display control corresponding to the new effect category based on the command transmission from the sound / light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72.

The information of the additional data is set as a blank as the initial setting of the control pattern table, and the writing process to the additional data is executed when there is an execution instruction of the notification. When writing to the additional data is performed, the information written in the additional data has priority over the information originally set in the task content. For example, when additional data corresponding to displaying a predetermined character as an image is set as a notification, the image is displayed so that the character image is added on the image corresponding to the content of the task. To.

In addition to the effect for the game round, the control pattern table is provided to correspond to the effect for the open / close execution mode, the effect for the game round, and the effect for the open / close execution mode. Has been done. By setting the control pattern table corresponding to various situations in this way, some control pattern table is read into the RAM 64 in the situation where the operating power is supplied to the sound light side MPU 62. There is.

Returning to the description of the main command correspondence process (FIG. 10), in step S406, it is determined whether or not the notification execution command is received from the main MPU 52. The notification execution command is used when it is specified in the fraud detection process of step S205 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) of the main MPU 52 that a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred. It is also output when it is specified in the input state monitoring process of step S212 that the game machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is in the open state. Since the notification execution command includes data corresponding to the content of the notification target, the sound and light side MPU 62 can specify the content of the notification target from the received notification execution command.

When the notification execution command is received (step S406: YES), the setting process for starting notification is executed (step S407). In the setting process for starting the notification, the data for executing the notification corresponding to the current notification execution command is set in the additional data after the current pointer information in the currently set control pattern table. For example, when a notification execution command corresponding to the detection of fraud is received, data for performing fraud notification by the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 is set as additional data. Further, when a notification execution command corresponding to a state change of the pachinko machine 10 such as opening of the game machine main body 12 is received, additional data is added for performing the state notification on the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45. Set as. As a result, the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 execute illegal notification or status notification. If the control pattern table to be executed is changed after the notification execution command is received and before the notification cancellation command is received, the additional data of the newly changed control pattern table is charged. , Notification data with the same content as the content set in the additional data of the previous control pattern table is set. This makes it possible to continue the execution of the notification.

After that, in step S408, the notification execution command corresponding to the content of the notification execution command received this time is transmitted to the display CPU 72. As a result, the display CPU 72 executes the display control so that the notification image corresponding to the notification execution command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

In step S409, it is determined whether or not a notification release command has been received from the main MPU 52. The notification release command is output when it is specified in the fraud detection process in step S205 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 8) of the main MPU 52 that the state in which a predetermined event has occurred has been released. , It is also output when it is specified in the input state monitoring process of step S212 that the game machine main body 12 or the front door frame 14 is closed from the open state.

When the notification release command is received (step S409: YES), the notification release setting process is executed (step S410). In the setting process for canceling the notification, the additional data after the current pointer information in the currently set control pattern table is cleared to "0". As a result, the fraudulent notification or the status notification executed by the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 is canceled. After that, in step S411, the notification release command is transmitted to the display CPU 72. As a result, the display of the broadcast image on the symbol display device 41 is completed.

In the main command corresponding process, in addition to each of the above processes, other corresponding processes are executed in step S412. In other corresponding processes, for example, when the final stop command is received from the main MPU 52, a process for ending the effect for the game round is executed. Further, when the opening command is received from the main MPU 52, the control pattern table for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode is read, and when the ending command is received from the main MPU 52, the open / close execution mode is used. Execute the process for ending the production of. Further, in a situation where neither the effect for the game round nor the effect for the open / close execution mode is executed, the control pattern table for executing the standby effect is read out.

<Command selection process>
Next, the command selection process executed in step S302 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described. Prior to the description of the command selection process, the contents of the command transmitted from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the command.

The command transmitted from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 has a multi-byte data structure. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C, it has a first command data CD1, a second command data CD2, and a third command data CD3. The first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 have the same number of bytes, and specifically, each has one byte. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each of the command data CD1 to CD3 may have a plurality of bytes.

In each of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3, the upper two bits have a function as identification bits, and the remaining six bits have a function as data bits. The identification bit is set with data indicating which of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 is its own command data. Specifically, "01" is set in the identification bit of the first command data CD1 as shown in FIG. 12 (a), and the identification bit of the second command data CD2 is set in FIG. 12 (b). As shown in FIG. 12C, “10” is set, and “11” is set as the identification bit of the third command data CD3 as shown in FIG. 12 (c).

Data corresponding to the content of instructions from the sound / light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 is set in the data bit. In the data bit of the first command data CD1, data for causing the display CPU 72 to specify the type of the first type as a general outline of the instruction contents is set. Specifically, if it is a command instructing the execution of the effect, data on the type of effect to be executed in the effect for game rounds, the effect for open / close execution mode, and the standby effect is set, and the notification is executed. If it is a command instructing, data indicating which of the fraudulent notification and the status notification is the execution target is set.

In the data bit of the second command data CD2, data for causing the display CPU 72 to specify the type of the second type included in the type of the first type specified by the first command data CD1 is set. Further, in the data bit of the third command data CD3, data for causing the display CPU 72 to specify the type of the third type included in the type of the second type specified by the second command data CD2 is set.

With reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 13, what kind of content is instructed by the command data CD1 to CD3 will be described by taking as an example a command instructing the execution of the effect.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, a notice display may occur as an effect for playing a game. The notice display is in a situation where the symbols are variablely displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41, or the symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of symbol rows in some symbol rows. It is a production that is performed in a situation where there is a situation, and the notice display is more likely to occur when the reach display is performed than when it is not performed, and the game times corresponding to the jackpot result are the game times corresponding to the off result. In comparison, notice display is more likely to occur. A plurality of types of notice displays are set, and as a part of them, a step-up notice and a conversation notice are set.

The step-up notice is an effect that is executed step by step, and the reach display is performed depending on the combination of the number of stages to be executed, the display color of the characters displayed when the effect is executed, and the type of the advance notice character to be displayed. The degree of expectation to be given and the degree of expectation to generate a jackpot result are suggested. In addition, the conversation notice is an effect in which a conversation is performed between the first notice character and the second notice character, and the content of the conversation to be executed, the display color of the characters of the conversation, and so on. And the combination of the types of the first notice character and the second notice character to be displayed suggests the degree of expectation that the reach display is performed and the degree of expectation that the jackpot result is generated.

When the first command data CD1 is expressed as a hexadecimal number and is "41", it corresponds to the step-up notice. In the case of step-up notice, the second command data CD2 indicates which of the number of steps, the character color, and the notice character is the instruction target, and the third command data CD3 indicates by the second command data CD2. The specific content of the instruction target is instructed. In this case, the content indicated by one type of command is only one of the plurality of types of second type content included in the step-up notice. That is, when executing the step-up notice, it is necessary to instruct the display CPU 72 of each type of the number of steps, the character color, and the notice character, but depending on one type of command, only one type of second type content is required. Is instructed. Therefore, when instructing the execution of the step-up notice, it is necessary to transmit three types of commands including each command data CD1 to CD3 for the type of the content of the second type. When the sound and light side MPU 62 completes the transmission of three types of commands to indicate the execution of the step-up notice, the sound and light side MPU 62 transmits a 1-byte end command to the display CPU 72. The end command has a data structure that is not used in other commands. Specifically, it is "FF" in hexadecimal. When the display CPU 72 receives the end command, it specifies that the transmission of the command group to be instructed this time is completed. As a result, even if a plurality of types of commands consisting of the first to third command data CD1 to CD3 are transmitted in order to instruct the execution of the step notice, it is displayed that all the reception of those commands has been completed. It becomes possible to clearly grasp it in the CPU 72.

When the first command data CD1 is expressed as a hexadecimal number and is "42", it corresponds to the conversation notice. In the case of a conversation notice, the second command data CD2 indicates the content of the conversation, the character color, which of the first notice character and the second notice character is the referent, and the third command data CD3 indicates the second command. The specific content of the referent specified by the data CD2 is instructed. In this case, in the case of the conversation notice as well as in the case of the step-up notice, the content instructed by one type of command is only one of the plurality of types of the second type contents included in the conversation notice. That is, when executing the conversation notice, it is necessary to instruct the display CPU 72 of each type of the conversation content, the character color, the first notice character and the second notice character, but one type may be used depending on one type of command. Only the contents of the second type of are instructed. Therefore, when instructing the execution of the conversation notice, it is necessary to transmit four types of commands including the command data CD1 to CD3 for each type of the content of the second type. When the sound and light side MPU 62 completes the transmission of four types of commands to indicate the execution of the conversation notice, the sound and light side MPU 62 transmits a 1-byte end command to the display CPU 72 as in the case of the step-up notice. As a result, even if a plurality of types of commands consisting of the first to third command data CD1 to CD3 are transmitted in order to instruct the execution of the conversation notice, it is displayed that all the reception of those commands has been completed. It becomes possible to clearly grasp it in the CPU 72. Further, even if the total number of commands transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 62 is different between the step-up notice and the conversation notice, the end command is transmitted when all the commands corresponding to each effect are transmitted. Therefore, it is possible for the display CPU 72 to clearly grasp that the reception of all the commands corresponding to each effect has been completed.

In addition, in order to indicate the contents of the second type of a plurality of types when instructing the execution of other effects, a plurality of types of commands are transmitted when a command instructing the execution of a predetermined effect is transmitted, and the commands are transmitted. When is completed, a termination command is sent. In addition, there is an effect in which the content of the second type is only one type, but when instructing the execution of such an effect, one type of command including each command data CD1 to CD3 is transmitted and the transmission is completed. If so, send a termination command. Further, the sound and light side MPU 62 finally transmits an end command when transmitting not only a command for an effect execution instruction but also a command for a notification execution instruction. As a result, the display CPU 72 can grasp whether or not the reception of the command from the sound / light side MPU 62 for giving a predetermined instruction is completed depending on whether or not the end command has been received.

When the sound / light side MPU 62 instructs the display CPU 72 to execute the notice display to be executed in the predetermined period, the first to third command data CD1 to CD3 correspond to the contents of the second stage included in the notice display. Multiple types of commands consisting of are sent. As a result, even when increasing or decreasing the number of types in the second stage or changing the contents of the second stage, the command can be changed in the corresponding unit of the second stage. Simplification is achieved.

In addition, by configuring the configuration to transmit a plurality of types of commands in a one-to-one correspondence with the contents of the second type in this way, even if one command is rewritten during transmission due to the influence of noise or the like. , It is possible to limit the influence to the content of one type and the second type.

By configuring the instruction content to be determined step by step by a plurality of command data CD1 to CD3, even when the content instructed from the sound / light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 is diversified, in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. The command design is facilitated.

Further, the data used as the second command data CD2 in the command for instructing the execution of the step-up notice is used as it is as the second command data CD2 in the command for instructing the execution of the conversation notice. The data used as the third command data CD3 in the command for instructing the execution of the step-up notice is used as it is as the third command data CD3 in the command for instructing the execution of the conversation notice. The data used as the respective command data CD1 to CD3 are stored in the ROM 63 in advance, but the data used as the second command data CD2 and the data used as the third command data CD3 as described above are Since the configuration is commonly used for a plurality of types of commands, it is possible to suppress the data capacity required for storing the command data in the ROM 63.

Hereinafter, the command selection process executed by the sound light side MPU 62 in order to transmit the above command will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When data indicating the command transmission timing to the display CPU 72 is set in the area corresponding to the current pointer information in the control pattern table (step S501: YES), the command in the current transmission timing from the control pattern table The number of types is read, and the value corresponding to the number of types is set in the command type number counter provided in the RAM 64 (step S502). After that, the address data of the command area of the ROM 63 designated in the area corresponding to the current pointer information in the control pattern table, and the address data corresponding to the value of the current command type number counter is specified. Then, according to the specified address data, the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 are read from the ROM 63 (steps S503 to S505), and the read command data CD1 to CD3 are transmitted as commands. It is set in the ring buffer provided in the RAM 64 as the target area (step S506). The sound and light side MPU 62 sequentially reads commands set in the ring buffer and transmits them to the display CPU 72 in a transmission interrupt process that is started periodically (for example, 1 msec) separately from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). In this case, the command set in the ring buffer with the earliest timing is sent first.

After that, the value of the command type number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S507), and it is determined whether or not the value of the command type number counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S508). If it is not "0", the processes of steps S503 to S506 are executed for the command corresponding to the value of the updated command type number counter. If it is "0", the end command is read from the ROM 63 and set in the ring buffer in step S509.

<Processing configuration of display CPU 72>
Next, the process executed by the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing that is repeatedly activated by the display CPU 72 in a predetermined cycle, specifically, in a cycle of 20 msec.

When the VDP76 outputs an image signal for one frame to the symbol display device 41, the VDP76 starts outputting the image signal from a dot in the upper left corner of the display surface P, and is on a horizontal line including the dot at one end. The image signal is sequentially output to the dots arranged in a row, and the image signal is output to the dots from the left to the right in order from the top for each horizontal line. Then, the image signal is finally output to the dots in the lower right corner of the display surface P. In this case, the VDP 76 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display CPU 72 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, and causes the display CPU 72 to recognize that the update of the image of one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec. In this respect, the V interrupt process can be regarded as being activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started, the V interrupt process is newly started.

In the V interrupt process, first, the command analysis process is executed in step S601. In the command analysis process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16A, it is determined in step S701 whether or not a new command is received from the sound / light side MPU 62. When the display CPU 72 receives the strobe signal from the sound / light side MPU 62, the display CPU 72 activates the command interrupt processing with the highest priority regardless of the processing being executed at that time, and outputs the command received at the input port 77. , It is stored in the command storage buffer 101 provided in the work RAM 73.

The command storage buffer 101 includes a first unprocessed area 102, a second unprocessed area 103, and a third unprocessed area 104, as shown in FIG. 16B. Each of the unprocessed areas 102 to 104 includes five command storage areas 102a to 102e, 103a to 103e, and 104a to 104e, respectively. Each command storage area 102a-102e, 103a-103e, 104a-104e can store one type of command including the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3, respectively. It has a 3-byte data structure. Further, as for the number of command storage areas 102a to 102e, 103a to 103e, 104a to 104e provided in each of the unprocessed areas 102 to 104, an effect execution instruction or a notification execution instruction is issued once from the sound light side MPU 62. It is more than the maximum number of types of commands to be sent when it is issued. As a result, it is possible to store the command group transmitted when the execution instruction of one effect and the command group transmitted when the execution instruction of one notification is performed in each of the unprocessed areas 102 to 104. Further, the number of unprocessed areas 102 to 104 is equal to or greater than the maximum number of command groups that can stand by in the unprocessed state on the display CPU 72. As a result, in a configuration in which an unprocessed command group can stand by, it is possible to prevent omission of execution of processing corresponding to the command group.

In command interrupt processing, when a new command is received after the last command was received, the command is stored in the first unprocessed area 102 if the unprocessed command group is not stored in the first unprocessed area 102. When the unprocessed command group is stored in the first unprocessed area 102, the command is stored in the second unprocessed area 103, and the unprocessed command group is stored in the second unprocessed area 103. If it is stored, the command is stored in the third unprocessed area 104. Then, until the end command is received, each time the command is received, the command storage process for the command storage area of the unprocessed area to be stored is sequentially executed. When the end command is received, the unprocessed area for command storage is set in the following order. In the command interrupt process, when a process for storing a command is executed, it is possible to specify which command storage area 102a to 102e, 103a to 103e, 104a to 104e is stored in the unprocessed area 102 to 104e. Set the data for.

Returning to the description of the command analysis process (FIG. 16 (a)), in step S701, it is determined whether or not the storage of the command in the unprocessed areas 102 to 104 is newly started. When an affirmative determination is made in step S701, "1" is set in the receiving flag provided in the work RAM 73 in order for the display CPU 72 to specify whether or not the command group is being received. When the process of step S702 is executed, or when "1" is set in the receiving flag (step S703: YES), it is determined whether or not the end command has been received in step S704. When the end command is received (step S704: YES), the value of the unprocessed counter provided in the work RAM 73 is added by 1 (step S705), and the receiving flag is cleared to "0" (step S706).

Returning to the description of the V interrupt process (FIG. 15), after executing the command analysis process in step S601, the step S602: YES, provided that the value of the unprocessed counter of the work RAM 73 is 1 or more (step S602: YES). The command correspondence process is executed in S603, and the value of the unprocessed counter is subtracted by 1 in step S604. The command correspondence process will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the read processing of the command to be processed this time is executed (step S801). Specifically, the command stored in the first unprocessed area 102 in the command storage buffer 101 of the work RAM 73 is written in the area for the command to be processed of the work RAM 73. When the writing is executed, after overwriting each data of the second unprocessed area 103 with the first unprocessed area 102 in the command storage buffer 101, each data of the third unprocessed area 104 is second unprocessed. Overwrite the processing area 103.

After that, a value corresponding to the number of types of commands to be processed this time is set in the processing target counter provided in the work RAM 73 (step S802). After that, the reference table corresponding to the first command data CD1 in the command to be processed this time is read from the memory module 74 (step S803). The reference table is provided so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the data contents of the first command data CD1, and specifies a display pattern table for executing the image display corresponding to the command to be processed on the symbol display device 41. The data to be used is set.

The reference table RT when the data corresponding to the step-up notice is set in the first command data CD1 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

In the reference table RT, the address of the execution target table is set in a one-to-one correspondence with all combinations of the third type types that can occur for all the second type types in the step-up notice. For example, when the type of the second type is "number of stages", the type of the third type is "2", and when the type of the second type is "character color", the type of the third type is "red". When the type of the third type is "24th character" when the type of the second type is "notice character", the address of the second stage red 24 table in the reference table RT is the execution target table. It is set as an address.

The execution target table displays an image for one frame at each update timing of the image when the moving image corresponding to the transmission of one command group from the sound light side MPU 62 is displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. It is a group of information that defines the processing required to make it work. In the execution target table, pointer information corresponding to the number of update timings included in the display period of the moving image by the execution target table is set, and the update timing corresponding to the pointer information is corresponding to each pointer information. Data is set to enable the display of the image in.

Returning to the explanation of the command correspondence process (FIG. 17), after reading the reference table in step S803, among the commands written in the processing target command area of the work RAM 73 in step S801, the value of the current processing target counter. The command corresponding to is read, and the data corresponding to the combination of the second command data CD2 and the third command data CD3 in the command is written to the register of the display CPU 72 (step S804). The value of the processing target counter has a one-to-one correspondence with the command storage areas 102a to 102e of the first unprocessed area 102, and in step S804, the processing target is processed from the command storage area corresponding to the value of the current processing target counter. The command written in the command area is the target for reading the above data.

After executing the process of step S804, the value of the processing target counter is subtracted by 1 in step S805. Then, in step S806, it is determined whether or not the value of the processing target counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0". If it is not "0", the process of step S804 is executed for the command corresponding to the value of the updated processing target counter. If it is "0", the execution target table is read out in step S807. In the read process, the address of the execution target table corresponding to the data read in the register of the display CPU 72 in step S804 is specified from the reference table read in step S803, and the area of the specified address in the memory module 74 is set. The stored execution target table is read into the work RAM 73. As a result, the reading of the execution target table corresponding to the command to be processed is completed, and the moving image corresponding to the command to be processed can be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

By the way, in the situation where the display control based on the execution target table for executing the effect such as the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the standby effect is executed, the execution for executing the fraudulent notification or the status notification is executed. When the target table is read, the execution target table for notification is read out to the work RAM 73 while the already read execution target table for effect is stored and held in the work RAM 73. Then, in the task process (FIG. 19) described later, an arithmetic process that enables the display of images corresponding to both of the execution target tables is executed, and in the pointer update process (step S607) described later, each pointer of the execution target table is executed. Update the information.

Returning to the explanation of the V interrupt process (FIG. 15), when the execution target table for fraud notification or status notification is newly set in the command correspondence process in step S603 (step S605: YES), or for fraud notification. Alternatively, even if the execution target table for status notification is not newly set (step S605: NO), "1" is set in the calculation completion flag provided in the work RAM 73 (step S606: YES). ), In step S607, the pointer update process is executed and the calculation completion flag is cleared to "0". In the pointer update process, the pointer information of the current execution target table is updated to the pointer information corresponding to the next update timing. In step S607 immediately after the execution target table is newly set in the command correspondence process (step S603), the pointer information update process is executed so that the pointer information corresponds to the first update timing. The calculation completion flag is a flag for specifying on the display CPU 72 whether or not various calculation processes for displaying an image corresponding to one update timing have been completed in the previous processing execution times of V interrupt processing. is there.

After executing the process of step S607, the task process is executed in step S608. In the task processing, in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing this time, the parameters necessary for giving the drawing instruction to the VDP 76 are calculated. Specifically, as parameters, drawing is performed using the address information of the area where the image data of the control target is stored in the memory module 74, the address information of the area where the image data of the control target is transferred in the VRAM 75, and the image data of the control target. Information on the frame areas 82a and 82b to be created, coordinate information when writing the image data to be controlled in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be created, scale information when writing the image data, and the relevant Information on a uniform α value (semi-transparent value) when writing image data is included.

After that, the drawing list output process is executed in step S609. In the drawing list output processing, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing related to this processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76. In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is the drawing target, and the parameter information updated in the task process is also set. The VDP76 creates drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the VRAM 75 according to this drawing list. The processing in this VDP 76 will be described in detail later.

The task process of step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the delay flag provided in the work RAM 73. In the task processing, various arithmetic processes such as background arithmetic processing, effect arithmetic processing, and symbol arithmetic processing are executed as described in detail later. In this case, the period required for executing various arithmetic processes varies depending on the number of individual images to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, the type of individual images, and the display mode of the individual images. Then, as a result of the change in the period, it may be the timing to start the next processing round of the V interrupt processing before the execution of all the arithmetic processing in the task processing is completed. In this case, if the execution of the V interrupt process is waited for, the display CPU 72 cannot quickly deal with the command transmission from the sound light side MPU 62. Therefore, when it is time to start the next processing round of the V interrupt processing during the execution of the task processing, the task processing is not continued as it is, but a new processing round of the V interrupt processing is started. It has become. However, when starting a new processing time of V interrupt processing, the calculation result of the task processing at that time is stored in memory, and the calculation processing is performed from the middle of the calculation in the task processing in the V interrupt processing of the new processing time. By restarting, the calculation process for one update timing is not left unexecuted. As a result, for example, in a configuration in which the parameter update for displaying a predetermined individual image is controlled by the difference from the previous update value, the parameter update is skipped once and the subsequent parameter update cannot be performed accurately. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as storage. The delay flag is a flag for the display CPU 72 to specify whether or not the execution of various arithmetic processes in the task process is temporarily interrupted and delayed as described above. The individual image is a still image defined by still image data such as background data, or a sprite defined by sprite data such as symbol sprite data.

If "1" is not set in the delay flag (step S901: NO), the setting process for starting control is executed (step S902). In the control start setting process, first, based on the currently set execution target table, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be controlled start target in this process. If it exists, the work RAM 73 searches for a free buffer area for performing various operations in controlling the individual image, and corresponds to the individual image grasped as the control start target on a one-to-one basis. Allocate free buffer area so as to. Further, the initialization process is executed for all the reserved free buffer areas, and the parameter information for starting control according to the individual image is set for the initialized free buffer area.

In the following step S903, the control update target is grasped. The control update target is an individual image for which the control start processing has been completed and which may be included in the image for one frame after the current processing time.

After that, the new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in step S904, the new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited in the immediately following step S905, and then the background arithmetic processing is executed (step S906). In the background calculation process, the control update target of the backmost still image and the background sprite that constitutes the background image is grasped. In addition, various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates, rotation angle, scale, uniform α value, and α data designation in the virtual two-dimensional plane is calculated and derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in the area secured corresponding to each individual image in the work RAM 73.

After that, the new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in step S907, the new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited in the immediately following step S908, and then the effect calculation process is executed (step S909). In the effect calculation process, the control update target of this time is grasped among the effect sprites constituting the image of the effect to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect. In addition, the above-mentioned various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in the area secured corresponding to each individual image in the work RAM 73.

After that, the new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in step S910, the new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited in the immediately following step S911, and then the symbol arithmetic processing is executed (step S912). In the operation calculation process for symbols, among the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner in each game, the control update target of this time is grasped. In addition, the above-mentioned various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in the area secured corresponding to each individual image in the work RAM 73.

Incidentally, in each of the arithmetic processes of step S906, step S909, and step S912, animation data set to change various parameter information of individual images according to a specific pattern is used each time the image update timing is reached. This animation data is defined according to the type of individual image. Further, in the symbol arithmetic processing, when the execution target table for fraud notification or status notification is read into the work RAM 73, the arithmetic processing for displaying the notification image corresponding to the execution target table is executed. The notification sprite for displaying the notification image and various parameter information applied to the notification sprite are derived.

After that, in step S913, "1" is set in the calculation completion flag provided in the work RAM 73. The calculation completion flag is a flag for the display CPU 72 to specify that the background calculation process in step S906, the effect calculation process in step S909, and the symbol calculation process in step S912 have been executed once each.

After that, in step S914, the drawing instruction target grasping process is executed. In the process of grasping the drawing instruction target, among the individual images targeted for control update by the arithmetic processing of steps S906, step S909, and step S912, the image for one frame related to the current drawing data creation instruction is included. Execute the process of grasping the individual image to be displayed. The grasp is performed by executing a predetermined calculation with reference to the information of the coordinates, rotation angle and scale of various individual images. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. By setting the individual images specified in the drawing list as only the individual images to be displayed instead of all the individual images for which control has been started, it is necessary to select the individual images to be displayed in the VDP 76. There is no need to uselessly draw an individual image that is not a display target even if it is not sorted. As a result, the processing load of VDP76 can be reduced.

Here, when a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started, the new activation of the V interrupt processing is prohibited, but the background arithmetic processing in step S906 and the production arithmetic processing in step S909 are prohibited. And at each timing before the symbol arithmetic processing of step S912 is executed, a new activation of the V interrupt processing is permitted (step S904, step S907, and step S910). As a result, when the start timing of a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is reached when step S904, step S907 or step S910 is executed, that is, 20 msec has already passed since the start of the current V interrupt processing. If so, the task processing is interrupted at that time, a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started, and the processing of step S601 described above is started. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period in which the start of the new processing time of the V interrupt processing is awaited even though the start timing of the new processing time of the V interrupt processing is set.

However, even when a new processing round of V interrupt processing is started in this way, the data corresponding to the processing results up to that point in the current task processing is stored and retained as it is. Further, in this case, the address data corresponding to the processing executed immediately before the start of a new processing round of the V interrupt processing is written in the interruption address area 111 provided in the work RAM 73. The address data written in the address area 111 for interruption is referred to when the task processing in the V interrupt processing of the new processing time is started, so that the processing execution is restarted from the timing when the interruption occurred in the previous task processing. It becomes possible to do.

Further, when the new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in step S904, step S907 and step S910, the background calculation process of step S906 is performed after the new activation is prohibited in step S905, step S908 and step S911. The effect calculation process in step S909 and the symbol calculation process in step S912 are executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a new processing time of the V interrupt processing from being started during the execution of various arithmetic processes. If a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing is started during the execution of various arithmetic processes, it is assumed that the amount of data in the process of arithmetic to be stored and retained becomes extremely large, and further new V interrupt processing is performed. The content of the address data when returning to the state in the middle of calculation in various processing times may become complicated. On the other hand, by prohibiting a new start of the V interrupt process before the various arithmetic processes are started, a new process cycle of the V interrupt process is prevented from being started in the middle of the various arithmetic processes. It becomes possible.

If a new processing round of V interrupt processing is started during the execution of task processing, V interrupt processing (FIG. 15) without executing the process of setting the calculation completion flag to "1" in step S913. The process of step S601 of the above will be started. Then, it is assumed that "1" is not set in the calculation completion flag, and a negative determination is made in step S606. In this case, "1" is set in the delay flag of the work RAM 73 in step S610.

When "1" is set in the delay flag, a positive determination is made in step S901 in the subsequent task processing (FIG. 19). In this case, after clearing the delay flag to "0" (step S915), by reading the address data from the interrupted address area 111 of the work RAM 73, a new processing round of V interrupt processing is started in the previous task processing. It jumps to the process executed immediately before being executed (step S916). As a result, it is possible to resume the execution of the process from the timing when the interruption occurred in the previous task process.

In the V interrupt process (FIG. 15), if a negative determination is made in step S606, a delay command is further transmitted to the sound light side MPU 62 (step S611). The deferred command includes pointer information data in the current execution target table. The process when the delay command is received by the sound light side MPU 62 is executed in the display side command corresponding process in step S306 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, when the delay command is received (step S1001: YES), the pointer information of the execution target table is read from the delay command received this time (step S1002). After that, it corresponds to the delay of the update timing in the display CPU 72 based on the pointer information of the control pattern table read into the RAM 64 of the voice emission control device 60 and the pointer information read from the delay command. The pointer range for the delay is calculated (step S1003).

Since the output timing of the command to the display CPU 72 is set in the control pattern table, it is possible to derive the pointer information of the timing when the execution instruction of the effect corresponding to the current execution target table in the display CPU 72 is given. is there. Further, although the cycle in which the pointer information of the control pattern table is updated in the sound light side MPU 62 and the cycle in which the pointer information of the execution target table is updated in the display CPU 72 are different, these cycles are predetermined cycles. Is almost constant. The sound light side MPU 62 can derive the original pointer information of the execution target table from the current pointer information of the control pattern table when the task processing is not interrupted by the display CPU 72. Then, from the difference between the derived pointer information and the pointer information grasped from the delay command of the display CPU 72, it is necessary to match the progress of control in the sound-light side MPU 62 with the progress of control in the display CPU 72. It is possible to derive the subtraction value of the pointer information of the control pattern table.

In step S1004, the derived subtraction value is subtracted from the current pointer information of the control pattern table to execute the adjustment process of the pointer information. As a result, even if the task processing is interrupted in the display CPU 72 and the update of the pointer information of the execution target table is delayed, the pointer information of the control pattern table in the sound light side MPU 62 is executed with the delay. It is possible to correspond to the pointer information of the target table.

The state in which the pointer information of the execution target table is adjusted in relation to the task processing will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 21 (a) shows the start timing of the V interrupt process, FIG. 21 (b) shows the execution period of the task process, and FIG. 21 (c) shows the update timing of the pointer information of the execution target table. d) shows the transmission timing of the delay command, and FIG. 21 (e) shows the timing when the display CPU 72 receives the notification execution command from the sound / light side MPU 62. In the following description, it is assumed that the pointer information is updated at the timing when the processing times of V interrupt processing are newly started, but actually, it is later than the timing when the processing times of V interrupt processing are newly started. However, the pointer information is updated at the timing before the task processing is started. This also applies to the output timing of the delay command.

First, a case where an interruption occurs in the middle of task processing and a case where a notification execution command is not received in the middle of the task processing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 21A, a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing is started at the timing of t1. In this case, the pointer information of the execution target table is updated as shown in FIG. 21 (c). After that, the task processing is started at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 21B, and the task processing ends at the timing of t3, which is the timing before the new activation timing (timing of t4) of the V interrupt processing. To do. In this case, the task processing is not interrupted.

After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), a new processing cycle of the V interrupt process is started at the timing of t4, and the pointer information of the execution target table is updated as shown in FIG. 21 (c). Then, at the timing of t5, the task process is started as shown in FIG. 21 (b). However, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), the timing of t6 during the execution of the task processing is a new start timing of the V interrupt processing. In this case, the task processing currently being executed is interrupted as shown in FIG. 21B, and a new processing round of the V interrupt processing is started.

At the timing of t6, the pointer information of the execution target table is not updated even if a new processing round of V interrupt processing is started. As a result, the task processing is started without updating the pointer information in the V interrupt processing of the new processing time, so the data corresponding to the pointer information set in the previous processing time of the V interrupt processing is used. It becomes possible to execute the task processing that has been performed. Further, at the timing of t6, a delay command is transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the sound / light side MPU 62 as shown in FIG. 21 (d). As a result, in a situation where the update of the pointer information in the execution target table of the display CPU 72 is delayed, the pointer information in the control pattern table of the sound light side MPU 62 can be adjusted according to the delay.

Next, a case where the task processing is interrupted and the notification execution command is received during the task processing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 21 (a), a new processing cycle of the V interrupt process is started at the timing of t9, and the pointer information of the execution target table is updated as shown in FIG. 21 (c). Then, at the timing of t10, the task process is started as shown in FIG. 21 (b). However, as shown in FIG. 21A, the timing of t12 during the execution of the task processing is a new start timing of the V interrupt processing. In this case, the task processing currently being executed is interrupted as shown in FIG. 21B, and a new processing round of the V interrupt processing is started.

However, the timing of t11, which is after the timing of t10, which is the start timing of the task processing that has been interrupted, and before the timing of t12, which is the start timing of a new processing time of the V interrupt processing. At the timing, as shown in FIG. 21 (e), the notification execution is received from the sound / light side MPU 62. Therefore, even if the task processing is interrupted at the timing of t12 and a new processing round of the V interrupt processing is started, the pointer information of the execution target table is updated as shown in FIG. 21 (c). Further, as shown in FIG. 21D, the delay command is not transmitted.

After that, the task process is started at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 21 (b). In the task processing, the calculation corresponding to the data of one pointer information is not executed in the execution target table for the production for the various calculation processes for the production, so that the settings of the various parameter information are normal. There is a possibility that the image display for production is not smoothly performed because it is not performed. On the other hand, since various arithmetic processes for notification are started in the task processing, it is possible to immediately start displaying the image for notification. After that, the task process ends at the timing of t14, which is a timing before the new start timing (timing of t15) of the V interrupt process. In this case, the task processing is not interrupted.

When a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started, the new activation of the V interrupt processing is prohibited. However, the background arithmetic processing in step S906, the effect arithmetic processing in step S909, and step S912 At each timing before the symbol arithmetic processing of No. 1 is executed, new activation of the V interrupt processing is permitted (step S904, step S907, and step S910). As a result, when the start timing of a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is reached when step S904, step S907 or step S910 is executed, that is, 20 msec has already passed since the start of the current V interrupt processing. If so, the task processing is interrupted at that time, a new processing time of the V interrupt processing is started, and the processing of step S601 described above is started. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period in which the start of the new processing time of the V interrupt processing is awaited even though the start timing of the new processing time of the V interrupt processing is set.

However, even when a new processing round of V interrupt processing is started in this way, the data corresponding to the processing results up to that point in the current task processing is stored and retained as it is. Further, in this case, the address data corresponding to the processing executed immediately before the start of a new processing round of the V interrupt processing is written in the interruption address area 111 provided in the work RAM 73. The address data written in the address area 111 for interruption is referred to when the task processing in the V interrupt processing of the new processing time is started, so that the processing execution is restarted from the timing when the interruption occurred in the previous task processing. It becomes possible to do.

When the new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in step S904, step S907 and step S910, the new activation is prohibited in step S905, step S908 and step S911, and then the background calculation process and step of step S906 are performed. The effect calculation process of S909 and the symbol calculation process of step S912 are executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a new processing time of the V interrupt processing from being started during the execution of various arithmetic processes. If a new processing cycle of V interrupt processing is started during the execution of various arithmetic processes, it is assumed that the amount of data in the process of arithmetic to be stored and retained becomes extremely large, and further new V interrupt processing is performed. The content of the address data when returning to the state in the middle of calculation in various processing times may become complicated. On the other hand, by prohibiting a new start of the V interrupt process before the various arithmetic processes are started, a new process cycle of the V interrupt process is prevented from being started in the middle of the various arithmetic processes. It becomes possible.

When the task processing is interrupted by the display CPU 72 and the task processing is restarted from the interrupted state in the next V interrupt processing, the display CPU 72 sends a delay command to the sound / light side MPU 62. In the sound light side MPU 62, the pointer information of the control pattern table is adjusted according to the delay. As a result, even if the delay occurs, it is possible to synchronize the content of the effect execution control on the sound / light side MPU 62 with the content of the effect execution control on the display CPU 72.

When the task processing is interrupted by the display CPU 72, a negative determination is made in step S606 of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 15), so that the pointer information of the execution target table is not updated and the sound and light side MPU 62 is reached. In the configuration in which the delay command of is transmitted, even if the task processing is interrupted, if the delay non-occurrence condition is satisfied, the determination process of step S606 is not executed, so that the pointer of the execution target table is executed. The information is updated and the delay command is not sent. Specifically, when the execution target table for fraud notification or status notification is newly read into the work RAM 73, the determination process of step S606 is executed by making an affirmative determination in step S605. The process of step S607 is executed without. As a result, although there is a possibility that the image display for the effect cannot be smoothly performed, it is possible to give the highest priority to the start of the display of the image corresponding to the fraudulent notification or the status notification. That is, even if the execution target table for notification is newly read into the work RAM 73 in the command correspondence process, the image for notification is displayed unless the pointer update process of step S607 is subsequently executed for the execution target table. Does not start. On the other hand, when the execution target table for notification is newly read, even if the task processing is interrupted last time, the pointer update processing in step S607 is executed to perform notification. It is possible to prevent the start of image display from being delayed.

<Basic processing in VDP76>
Next, the basic processing executed by the VDP 76 will be described.

In the VDP 76, a process of setting the value of the register 92 based on the command transmitted from the display CPU 72, a process of creating drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the frame buffer 82 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72, A process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 41 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 82a and 82b.

Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 92 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 95 for the display CPU 72. Further, the process of creating drawing data is repeatedly started by the control unit 91 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec). Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 94 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the process, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76 will be described. 22 (a) to 22 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information of the target buffer, which is information indicating which of the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b, the drawing data corresponding to the image for one frame related to the drawing list is drawn is set. Has been done. Further, in the header information, information on whether or not decoding is specified and the address of the moving image data to be decoded are set.

In addition to the above header information, a plurality of types of image data used for displaying an image for one frame are set in the drawing list, and further, information on the drawing order of each image data and information on each image data. Parameter information and is set. In detail, the information of the drawing order is set so as to be the numerical information of the serial number, and the information of the image data to be used is set in which each numerical information has a one-to-one correspondence. In addition, parameter information is set so that there is a one-to-one correspondence with the information of each image data.

The drawing order is set so that the individual images to be displayed so as to be located on the back side of the display surface P in the image for one frame are drawn first. The individual image is a still image defined by still image data such as background data, or a sprite defined by sprite data such as symbol sprite data. In the drawing list of FIG. 22A, the background data is set as the first drawing target, the sprite data A is set as the second, the sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, the background data is first written to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, then the sprite data A is written so as to overlap the background data, and then the sprite data B is written. In the image for one frame, each individual image is displayed so as to be on the front side in the order of background image → effect image → symbol.

A plurality of types of parameters are set in the parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3), .... Specifically, regarding the background data parameter P (1), as shown in FIG. 22 (b), the address information of the area where the background data is stored in the memory module 74 and the area for transferring the background data in the VRAM 75. Address information, coordinate information indicating the position on the two-dimensional plane when writing background data, rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle on the two-dimensional plane when writing background data, and the initial background data Scale information indicating the magnification when writing to the frame areas 82a and 82b with respect to the size set as the state, and uniform α value information indicating the entire transparency information (or transparency information) when writing the background data. And the information of α data designation indicating whether or not α data is applied and the application target are set. As shown in FIG. 22C, the types of the above parameters are the same for the sprite data A.

The coordinate information is not set individually for all the pixels constituting the image data, but the information of one coordinate is set for one image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel for which coordinate information is specified. In VDP76, it is possible to recognize that the information of the designated coordinates is one pixel at the center of the image data, and when arranging the image data, one pixel at the center is set on the designated coordinates. .. As a result, the information capacity (that is, the amount of data) of the coordinate information to be specified for one image data in the display CPU 72 can be suppressed. Further, since it is not necessary for the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 to be able to recognize the coordinates for all the pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to one pixel at the center, and may be a pixel at a corner such as an upper left or an upper right. Since the sprite data and the still image data are basically defined as a rectangular shape, by using the pixels at the corners as the reference pixels, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can easily recognize the reference pixels.

Further, the uniform α value is transparent information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 72. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transparent information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as image data. In the α data, the transparency information can be different for each pixel within the range of the same background data or the same sprite data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

Since the α value and α data are set uniformly as described above, in a situation where the transparency of background data and sprite data should be controlled uniformly for all pixels instead of being finely controlled for each pixel. It is possible to reduce the required data capacity by being able to handle with a uniform α value, and it is also possible to finely control the transmittance in pixel units by applying α data.

The drawing process in the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the creation of the drawing data instructed in the drawing list that has already been received is completed. When the creation of the drawing data is completed, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 72. If a new drawing list has been received, the corresponding process at the time of reception is executed in step S1103.

In the corresponding processing at the time of reception, from the information of the target buffer included in the drawing list, it is grasped which frame areas 82a and 82b the drawing data for one frame corresponding to the drawing list received this time is drawn.

In the following step S1104, the content grasping process is executed. In the content grasping process, the image data set as the read target in the drawing list is read from the memory module 74 and written to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Further, in the content grasping process, the type of image data initially set as the drawing target in the drawing list is grasped, and various parameter information of the image data is grasped. In the writing process, the image data to be drawn this time is written in the frame areas 82a and 82b set as the creation target based on the grasping result of the content grasping process in step S1104.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1101 that the drawing data instructed by the already received drawing list is being created, the drawing list counter is updated in step S1106. As a result, the drawing target is switched to the image data in the next drawing order. Then, the processes of steps S1104 and S1105 are executed for the switched image data. That is, by executing the drawing process a plurality of times, the drawing data of the image for one frame specified by one drawing list is created.

Note that the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which only one image data is processed in one drawing process, and a configuration in which a plurality of image data are processed in one drawing process may be used, and the drawing process may be performed. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each processing time of the above, and a configuration in which a different number of image data is processed in each processing time of the drawing processing may be used.

When a negative determination is made in step S1102, or after the process of step S1105 is executed, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the image signal output for one frame is completed in the display circuit 94. If it is not completed, the main drawing process is terminated as it is, and if it is completed, the V interrupt signal is output to the display CPU 72 in step S1108, and then the main drawing process is terminated.

The creation of the drawing data for one frame is performed so as to be completed within the range of the 20 msec cycle. Further, an image signal is output from the display circuit 94 to the symbol display device 41 based on the created drawing data. However, since the double buffer method is adopted as described above, the output of the image signal is output to the output. It is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data corresponding to the update timing after one frame for the relevant frame. The display circuit 94 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame areas 82a and 82b to be referred to each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed, and the control unit 91 is switched by the selector circuit. The frame areas 82a and 82b, which are the drawing targets of the drawing data, are regulated so as not to be output targets for outputting the image signal.

<Structure for performing color change production>
Next, a configuration for performing a color change effect will be described.

24 (a) to 24 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the content of the color change effect. As shown in FIGS. 24 (a-1) to 24 (a-3), the color change effect is a moving image in which the color change effect character CH1 performs a predetermined operation in a predetermined period consisting of a plurality of image update timings. When it is displayed, the display color of the color change target area CR of the color change effect character CH1 is changed according to the situation of the game. For example, when a color change effect is executed as an effect for game rounds, the display color of the color change target area CR suggests to the player the degree of expectation of reach display occurrence and the degree of expectation of a jackpot result. Further, when the color change effect is applied to the slot machine instead of the pachinko machine 10, the color change target area CR may be displayed in the display color according to the type of the winning combination in the internal lottery.

The color change effect character CH1 is displayed so as to be recognized by the player as representing a person having a face, a torso, both hands, and both feet. The color change target area CR is set at a plurality of places in the color change effect character CH1. Specifically, the color change target area CR is set in the head portion, both shoulder portions, and the body portion of the color change effect character CH1. The display colors of the color change target area CRs at a plurality of locations are set to the same color. For example, when the display color of the color change target area CR is set to blue, the head portion, both shoulder portions, and the body portion of the color change effect character CH1 are displayed in blue, and the display color of the color change target area CR is displayed. When is set to red, the head portion, both shoulder portions, and the body portion of the color change effect character CH1 are displayed in red. Further, in the final stage of the color change effect, as shown in FIG. 24 (a-3), the color change effect image EG1 is displayed for the color change effect character CH1. The effect image is an image showing a blast, an image showing water droplets, a light emitting image showing how light is shining from a light source to the surroundings, and an aura image showing the surroundings of a character as if they are emitting light. In addition, it is an image for enhancing the visual effect. As the effect image EG1 for the color change effect, an image in which light rays are emitted from the character CH1 for the color change effect is displayed.

When performing the color change effect, the base still image data BD1, BD2, BD3 shown in FIGS. 24 (b-1) to 24 (b-3) and FIGS. 24 (c-1) to 24 (c-). The part image data PD1, PD2, PD3 shown in 3) are used. The base still image data BD1 to BD3 are image data for displaying the color change effect character CH1. The part image data PD1 to PD3 are image data for overwriting the color change target area CR in the color change effect character CH1 by the base still image data BD1 to BD3, and are for adding the effect image EG1 for the color change effect. It is the image data of. After drawing the base still image data BD1 to BD3 shown in FIGS. 24 (b-1) to 24 (b-3) in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, FIGS. 24 (c-1) to 24 (c-1) to FIG. 24 ( By drawing the part image data PD1 to PD3 shown in c-3), as shown in FIGS. 24 (a-1) to 24 (a-3), a color change effect is produced on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. The character CH1 is displayed and the display color of the color change target area CR is changed according to the situation.

Hereinafter, a specific configuration for executing the color change effect will be described. First, the data structure for executing the color change effect will be described. FIG. 25A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the memory module 74 for executing the color change effect. As shown in FIG. 25 (a), the memory module 74 includes base moving image data BMD for enabling derivation of base still image data BD1 to BD3, first to nth part image data PD1 to PD3, and the like. The color palette data group CP is stored in advance.

The base moving image data BMD is image data that is compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of difference data with reference to still image data for one frame, and is encoded by, for example, the MPEG2 method. When the base moving image data BMD is decoded, it is expanded into still image data for a plurality of frames. Specifically, in the base moving image data BMD, file data is set at the first address, and then compressed data of each frame is set. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame. The compressed data includes I picture data for one frame corresponding to the reference data, P picture data for a plurality of frames corresponding to the first difference data, and B picture data for a plurality of frames corresponding to the second difference data. And have. The I-picture data is data that can create one frame of still image data by itself at the time of decoding. The P-picture data is data capable of creating still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to the I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before decoding. .. The B picture data is bidirectionally predicted by referring to the I picture data or P picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before and the I picture data or P picture data one frame or a plurality of frames after the decoding. It is data that can create still image data for one frame. In the compressed data of the base moving image data BMD, I picture data is set as the data of the first frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the second frame, ..., The m-1th frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data of the mth frame. Further, B picture data is set as the data of the m + 1 frame, ..., The n-1 frame. Further, P picture data is set as the data of the nth frame. The arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above and is arbitrary.

The number of base still image data BD1 to BD3 created by expanding the base moving image data BMD is for all the frames included in the execution period of the color change effect. As shown in FIGS. 24 (b-1) to 24 (b-3), the base still image data BD1 to BD3 are image data for displaying only the color change effect character CH1. By using all the base still image data BD1 to BD3, it is possible to display a moving image in which the color change effect character CH1 is operating according to a predetermined operation path. Further, each pixel of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 is set with one byte of color information for each of RGB, and an opaque α value is set.

The first to nth parts image data PD1 to PD3 are provided in the same number as the base still image data BD1 to BD3 so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the base still image data BD1 to BD3. As shown in FIGS. 24 (c-1) to 24 (c-3), the first to nth parts image data PD1 to PD3 are in the color change effect character CH1 by the corresponding base still image data BD1 to BD3. It is set so that the color change target area CR having the same position, shape, and size as the color change target area CR can be displayed. In this case, the data of each part image data PD1 to PD3 are set so that a plurality of color change target area CRs are displayed at distant positions, but the plurality of color change target area CRs are collectively displayed. The data of the frame area FR that fills the space between the plurality of color change target areas CR is set so that it can be treated as one image data. Color information is not set for each pixel of the frame area FR, and a completely transparent α value is set. On the other hand, although one byte of color information is set for each pixel of the color change target area CR, the α value is not set. Therefore, when the part image data PD1 to PD3 are overwritten on the base still image data BD1 to BD3, the image by the part image data PD1 to PD3 is displayed for the color change target area CR, but other areas. As for, the images based on the base still image data BD1 to BD3 are displayed as they are.

As shown in FIG. 24C, the part image data for a plurality of frames from the intermediate timing frame to the end timing frame on the end side of the color change effect among the part image data PD1 to PD3. Data for displaying not only the color change target area CR but also the effect image EG1 for color change effect is set. One byte of color information is set for each pixel for displaying the effect image EG1 for color change effect, and an α value which is a translucent value is set. When the part image data is overwritten on the base still image data, not only the color change target area CR is overwritten in the color change effect character CH1, but also the color change effect is shown as shown in FIG. 24 (a-3). A semi-transparent effect image EG1 for color change effect is displayed around the character CH1. Then, the state in which the effect image EG1 for color change effect is displayed in this way continues over a plurality of frames up to the frame at the end timing.

The color palette data group CP includes a plurality of color palettes CP1 and CP2 for designating a display color to be applied to the color information of the color change target area CR in each part image data PD1 to PD3. The color palettes CP1 and CP2 are table data in which color information is determined by one-to-one correspondence with all the data that can be set for each pixel of the parts image data PD1 to PD3, and the color palette CP1 to be used is used. , CP2 is used to derive the color information corresponding to the data set for each pixel.

As shown in FIGS. 25 (b-1) and 25 (b-2), the data of each color palette CP1 and CP2 are set so that different colors are used as the base color. For example, the color palette CP1 shown in FIG. 25 (b-1) is based on red, and the color palette CP2 shown in FIG. 25 (b-2) is based on green. Therefore, when the color palette CP1 of FIG. 25 (b-1) is applied, the color change target area CR by each part image data PD1 to PD3 is based on red, and the color palette CP1 of FIG. 25 (b-1) is used. When is applied, the color change target area CR by each part image data PD1 to PD3 is based on green. Since the color palettes CP1 and CP2 are data in which only the relationship between the color information and the display color is defined, the data capacity of one color palette CP1 and CP2 is smaller than the data capacity of one part image data PD1 to PD3. Further, the total data capacity of all the color palettes CP1 and CP2 included in the color palette data group CP is smaller than the data capacity of one part image data PD1 to PD3. Furthermore, in a configuration in which three or more types of display colors of the color change target area CR are set, the sum of all the data capacities of the part image data PD1 to PD3 and all the data capacities of the color palettes CP1 and CP2 is the base. It is smaller than the data capacity of double the data capacity of the moving image data BMD. As a result, it is possible to reduce the data capacity required for storing the image data in advance, as compared with the configuration in which the base moving image data BMD is prepared for the type of display color of the color change target area CR.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the color change effect will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process for color change effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the color change effect is executed in the effect calculation process of step S909 in the task process (FIG. 19). In addition, the arithmetic processing for the color change effect is started when the information about the color change effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

When it is the start timing of the color change effect (step S1201: YES), the addresses of the base moving image data BMD and the first to nth part image data PD1 to PD3 in the memory module 74 are grasped (step S1202 and step). S1203). Further, the addresses in the memory modules 74 of the color palettes CP1 and CP2 corresponding to the display colors set in the execution target table this time are grasped (step S1204). After that, the color change effect start designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the color change effect should be started in step S1205 is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

When a negative determination is made in step S1201 or when the process of step S1205 is executed, various addresses corresponding to the current frame numbers set in the current pointer information in the execution target table are grasped (step S1206). Specifically, when the base moving image data BMD is decoded and the base still image data BD1 to BD3 for a plurality of frames are expanded in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, the base still image data corresponding to the current frame number is used. In the address of the area where BD1 to BD3 are stored, the address of the area where the part image data PD1 to PD3 corresponding to the frame number of this time are stored in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75, and the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Grasp the address of the area where the color palettes CP1 and CP2 corresponding to the display color this time are stored.

In the following step S1207, various parameter information of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 and the part image data PD1 to PD3 to be used this time is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is used in the work RAM 73 as these base still image data. The control information is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to BD1 to BD3 and part image data PD1 to PD3. After that, in step S1208, the color change effect designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the color change effect should be executed is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

When the arithmetic processing for the color change effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609) includes the base still image data BD1 corresponding to the current frame number. ~ BD3 and part image data PD1 to PD3 are set as drawing targets, and the color palettes CP1 and CP2 corresponding to the current display color are set as usage targets. Further, in the drawing list, parameter information applied to the base still image data BD1 to BD3 and the part image data PD1 to PD3 is set, and color change effect designation information is set. When it is the start timing of the color change effect, the color change effect start designation information is set.

Next, the setting process for the color change effect and the write process for the color change effect executed by the VDP 76 will be described. The setting process for the color change effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1104 of the drawing process (FIG. 23), and the writing process for the color change effect is the drawing process (FIG. 23). It is executed as a part of the writing process executed in step S1105 of the above. Further, when the color change effect designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the color change effect and the write process for the color change effect are executed. Here, in the drawing list, since the color change effect designation information is set in association with the image data for the effect, the setting process for the color change effect and the write process for the color change effect are included in the drawing list of this time. , It is activated when the drawing order of the image data for production is reached.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the setting process for the color change effect.

When the color change effect start designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S1301: YES), the base moving image data BMD is stored in the memory module 74 from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The address of the area is grasped, and the base moving image data BMD is read from the memory module 74 into the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 based on the grasped result (step S1302). Then, the video decoder 93 is used to execute the decoding process of the base video data BMD (step S1303). As a result, all of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 are expanded and stored in the base moving image area provided in the expansion buffer 81.

After that, in step S1304, the address of the area where the first to nth parts image data PD1 to PD3 are stored in the memory module 74 is grasped from the information of the address set in the drawing list, and the grasping result is obtained. Based on this, all of the first to nth part image data PD1 to PD3 are read from the memory module 74 into the part image area provided in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Further, in step S1305, the address of the area where the color palettes CP1 and CP2 corresponding to the current display color are stored is grasped from the address information set in the drawing list, and the memory module is based on the grasped result. The color palettes CP1 and CP2 are read from 74 into a palette area provided in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75.

When a negative determination is made in step S1301 or when the process of step S1305 is executed, in step S1306, the information of the address where the base still image data BD1 to BD3 to be set this time are stored is grasped from the drawing list. At the same time, in step S1307, the information of the address where the part image data PD1 to PD3 to be set this time are stored is grasped from the drawing list. Further, in step S1308, the parameter information of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 and the part image data PD1 to PD3 is grasped from the information set in the drawing list.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a writing process for color change effect.

First, the base still image data BD1 to BD3 to be drawn this time are drawn with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. This drawing is performed with reference to the coordinates specified in the drawing list in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn (step S1401).

After that, in steps S1402 to S1406, the part image data PD1 to PD3 to be drawn this time are subjected to the base still image data BD1 in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn according to the color palettes PD1 and PD2 corresponding to the display color this time. ~ BD3 overwrites each drawn dot.

Specifically, first, in step S1402, a value corresponding to the total number of pixels in the part image data PD1 to PD3 to be drawn this time is set in the write processing counter provided in the register 92. After that, in step S1403, the color information corresponding to the data set in the pixels corresponding to the value of the current write processing counter in the part image data PD1 to PD3 to be drawn this time corresponds to the display color this time. Read from the color palettes PD1 and PD2. In step S1404, the color information read in step S1403 is overwritten with dots corresponding to the values of the current write processing counter in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn.

By the way, when the pixel of this time corresponds to the frame area FR other than the color change target area CR or the effect image EG1 for color change effect, colorless color information regardless of which color palette PD1 or PD2 is used. Is selected and the color information is overwritten so that it becomes completely transparent. In this case, the color information of the base still image data BD1 to BD3 written in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn is maintained without being changed. Further, when the pixel of this time corresponds to the color change target area CR, the color information based on the display color of this time is overwritten as opaque. Further, when the pixel of this time corresponds to the effect image EG1 for color change effect, the color information corresponding to the effect image EG1 is overwritten as semi-transparent.

After that, in step S1405, the value of the write processing counter of the register 92 is subtracted by 1, and in step S1406, it is determined whether or not the value of the write processing counter after the subtraction is "0". If it is not "0", the pixel writing process corresponding to the value of the write processing counter after subtraction is executed, and if it is "0", the writing process for this color change effect is terminated as it is. ..

As image data for displaying the character CH1 for color change effect, parts image data PD1 to PD3 are provided separately from the base video data BMD, and the base still image data obtained by decoding the base video data BMD. By overwriting the part image data PD1 to PD3 for BD1 to BD3 and changing the types of the color palettes PD1 and PD2 applied to the part image data PD1 to PD3, the colors are used while using the same base video data BMD. It is possible to change the display color of the color change target area CR of the change effect character CH1. As a result, it is possible to reduce the data capacity required for storing the image data in advance, as compared with the configuration in which the base moving image data BMD is prepared for the type of display color of the color change target area CR.

The part image data PD1 to PD3 are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the base still image data BD1 to BD3 obtained by decoding the base moving image data BMD. As a result, the display color of the color change target area CR of the color change effect character CH1 can be set to a predetermined color over the entire display period of the image by the base moving image data BMD.

The display color of the color change target area CR is changed by changing the color palettes PD1 and PD2 applied to the part image data PD1 to PD3. As a result, it is possible to reduce the data capacity required for storing the image data as compared with the configuration in which the combination of the part image data PD1 to PD3 is prepared in advance by the number of changeable display colors.

Although the color information is set in the base still image data BD1 to BD3 obtained by decoding the base moving image data BMD, the α value that becomes completely transparent or translucent is not set. If still image data with an α value set to be completely transparent or translucent is compressed as moving image data, the α value may adversely affect the difference data and the image quality may deteriorate, but as the base still image data BD1 to BD3 Since the α value that is completely transparent or translucent is not set, it is possible to compress the image data while preventing such deterioration of image quality. Similarly, the part image data PD1 to PD3 in which the completely transparent or translucent α value is set together with the color information are prepared as still image data instead of being compressed as moving image data. This makes it possible to prevent deterioration of the image quality of the part image data PD1 to PD3.

Data for displaying the effect image EG1 for the color change effect is set in the part image data PD3 for a plurality of frames from the frame of the intermediate timing on the end side of the color change effect to the frame of the end timing. Since the data of the effect image EG1 for color change effect is not only the color information but also the data in which the semi-transparent α value is set, if such data is compressed as the base moving image data BMD, the α value adversely affects the difference data. There is a risk that the image quality will deteriorate. On the other hand, since the data of the effect image EG1 for color change effect is set for the part image data PD3 which is still image data, the image quality when displaying the effect image EG1 for color change effect is good. It becomes possible to make it.

<Another form of configuration related to color change production>
-The content of the image added by superimposing other image data on multiple still image data created by decoding the moving image data is a part of the character area displayed by the moving image data. The configuration is not limited to the image of the above, and a character different from the character displayed by the moving image data may be added. In this case, the moving image is displayed so that the character performs a predetermined operation in the moving image data, and the moving image is displayed so that the other character performs a predetermined operation by the image data added to the still image data by the moving image data. It may be a configuration to be performed.

-By superimposing other image data on a plurality of still image data created by decoding the moving image data, an image corresponding to the other image data can be displayed on the image displayed by the moving image data. In the configuration to be added, instead of the configuration in which the content of the image to be added is changed by providing a plurality of the other image data, the same is applied to the plurality of still image data created by the moving image data. The same still image may be added to the moving image display created by the moving image data by superimposing the image data.

-The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the part image data PD1 to PD3 are stored as they are as still image data, and the configuration may be such that the part image data PD1 to PD3 are compressed as moving image data. In this case, when performing a color change effect, both the base video data BMD and the video data corresponding to the parts image data PD1 to PD3 are decoded, and the still image data created by decoding the base video data BMD. On the other hand, it is necessary to superimpose and set the still image data created by decoding the latter moving image data.

-The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the part image data PD1 to PD3 are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the still image data created by decoding the base video data BMD, and the base video data BMD is decoded. The still image data created by the above may be configured to have more than the part image data PD1 to PD3. In this case, the same part image data PD1 to PD3 are applied to each still image data created from the base moving image data BMD at a plurality of predetermined update timings. For example, in a configuration in which the display position, shape, and size of the color change target area CR are changed only once for a plurality of update timings, the parts image data PD1 to PD3 may be provided for the number of the change timings. .. This makes it possible to reduce the number of part image data PD1 to PD3. Further, the component image data PD1 to PD3 may have more parts than the still image data created by decoding the base moving image data BMD. In this case, different part image data PD1 to PD3 can be set for the same still image data created from the base moving image data BMD, and the color change target area can be set while the color change effect character CH1 is stationary. It is possible to move or deform the CR.

-Limited to a configuration in which only one part image data PD1 to PD3 is applied to the still image data created from the base video data BMD at each update timing of the period during which the video is displayed by the base video data BMD. It may be configured in which two or more part image data are applied at one update timing.

<Structure for producing effects>
Next, the configuration for performing the effect effect will be described with reference to FIG. 29. 29 (a) to 29 (e) are explanatory views for explaining the effect effect.

As shown in FIG. 29A, the effect effect means that the effect image EG2 overlaps the effect effect character CH2 from the front of the display surface P in a situation where the effect effect character CH2 is displayed as a moving image. This is the effect that is displayed. Specifically, as the effect image EG2, an image representing smoke is displayed.

As image data for displaying the effect effect character CH2, the character still image data SD is stored in advance in the memory module 74. A plurality of character still image data SDs are provided so that the effect effect character CH2 can perform a predetermined operation during the effect effect execution period. As shown in FIG. 29B, the character still image data SD handles the data for displaying the effect effect character CH2 as individual images and the image by the character still image data SD as a rectangular image. It is provided with the data of the frame area FR1 set so as to surround the periphery of the effect effect character CH2 in order to enable the above.

As image data for displaying the effect image EG2, the effect image data ED1 is stored in advance in the memory module 74. A plurality of effect image data ED1s are provided so that the effect image EG2 can be changed in a predetermined mode during the execution period of the effect effect. As shown in FIG. 29 (c), the effect image data ED1 makes it possible to handle the data for displaying the effect image EG2 as an individual image and the image by the effect image data ED1 as a rectangular image. Therefore, the data of the frame area FR2 set to surround the effect image EG2 is provided.

The still image data SD for characters and the image data ED1 for effects are formed so as to have the same size and shape at the time of initial setting. Further, since the pixels constituting the effect effect character CH2 and the effect image EG2 are set with an opaque or translucent α value, they are displayed on the display surface P, but each frame area FR1 and FR2 are formed. Since a completely transparent α value is set for the pixel, it is not a display target on the display surface P.

As described above, the frame areas 82a and 82b on which the still image data SD for characters and the image data ED1 for effects are drawn include a large number of unit areas, and each unit area stores color information. Area is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (d), color information storage areas 121a to 121c consisting of 1 byte are set in each unit area 121 so as to correspond one-to-one with each color of RGB. 256 colors can be set for each of RGB and RGB.

The smaller the value of the numerical information stored in each of the color information storage areas 121a to 121c, the darker the color is finally displayed in RGB, and in the case of the minimum value, black is displayed. Further, the larger the value of the numerical information is, the brighter the color is finally displayed in RGB, and in the case of the maximum value, white is displayed. In a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed instead of the full-color system, the color information storage areas 121a to 121c need only be 1 byte.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 29 (e), color information consisting of numerical information is set in each pixel 122 of the character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 by using a color palette or the like. Each pixel 122 is set with color information defining areas 122a to 122c having one byte corresponding to each color of RGB on a one-to-one basis, and 256 colors can be displayed for each of RGB.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the color information storage areas 121a to 121c of each unit area 121 are set to 1 byte instead of 3 bytes, and in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed, each pixel 122 The color information defining areas 122a to 122c may also be set with 1 byte.

In addition to the color information defining areas 122a to 122c, the α value defining area 122d is set in each pixel 122, and the α value information is set. Although a storage capacity of 1 byte is secured as the α value defining area 122d, numerical information of any one of "0 to 100" is actually set as a decimal number. Further, the α value information is numerical information of "0 to 100", which corresponds to the α value of "0 to 1", and is treated as a value less than 1 in the calculation using the α value.

When the color information of each pixel 122 is drawn in the unit area 121 to be drawn, each numerical information obtained by integrating the α value with each RGB numerical information in each pixel 122 is used for storing the color information in the unit area 121. It is stored for each of the corresponding areas of RGB of the areas 121a to 121c. In this case, when an opaque α value (specifically, “1”) is set, the color information of the pixel 122 is overwritten as it is on the corresponding unit area 121, and the completely transparent α value (specifically, “1”) is set. Specifically, when "0") is set, the color information of the pixel 122 is not written for the corresponding unit area 121.

When 0 <α value <1, a predetermined calculation using the α value is executed with the image superimposed on the back side of the display surface P, and the calculation result is obtained with respect to the unit area 121. Written. When a pixel having 0 <α value <1 in the still image data SD for a character is written in the unit area 121, a blending process is executed with an image superimposed on the back side of the display surface P. More specifically, the color information already written in the unit area 121 is set to "r1, g1, b1", and the color information to be written next in the unit area 121 is set to "r2, g2, b2". When the α value set along with the color information is α1,
R: r1 × (1-α1) + r2 × α1
G: g1 × (1-α1) + g2 × α1
B: b1 × (1-α1) + b2 × α1
Will be.

On the other hand, in the case of the effect image data ED1, 0 <α value <1 is set as the semi-transparent α value for all the pixels for displaying the effect image EG2. Then, when the pixels are drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b, the pixel addition process for displaying the effect image EG2 is executed for each unit area 121 in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. .. More specifically, the color information already written in the unit area 121 is set to "r3, g3, b3", and the color information of the effect image EG2 written in the unit area 121 is set to "r4, g4, b4". , When the α value set accompanying the color information is α2,
R: r3 + r4 × α2
G: g3 + g4 × α2
B: b3 + b4 × α2
Will be.

By executing the above addition process, the effect image EG2 corresponding to the effect image data ED1 reflects the color information and the degree of brightness of the effect effect character CH2 on which the effect image EG2 is superimposed. Is displayed. As described above, the effect image EG2 is an image that allows an object on the back side to pass through, such as smoke, and therefore, if it is displayed independently of the effect effect effect character CH2, a sense of incongruity will occur. On the other hand, by executing the addition process as described above, the effect image EG2 is displayed in a state where the effect effect effect character CH2 is reflected, and the effect image EG2 is displayed without causing the above-mentioned discomfort. It will be preferable.

When the effect image EG2 is applied in this way, the addition process is executed. However, when the same bright effect image EG2 is superimposed on the bright image, the color is displayed in the unit area 121 of the frame areas 82a and 82b. The information storage areas 121a to 121c have the maximum value, which may deviate from the designer's intention and cause a white display (so-called overexposure). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect effect is executed while suppressing the occurrence of the overexposure.

The specific processing configuration for executing the effect effect while suppressing the occurrence of overexposure will be described below. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for effect effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for effect effect is executed in the effect calculation process in step S909 in the task process (FIG. 19). Further, the arithmetic processing for the effect effect is started when the information about the effect effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

First, in step S1501, the character data to be displayed is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. The character data includes the still image data SD for characters, and the still image data SD for characters of the type corresponding to the update timing of the current frame is grasped as a display target. By the way, when the effect effect is executed, the effect image EG2 is displayed as a moving image as if the effect effect character CH2 is performing a predetermined operation over a plurality of frames in a situation where the effect image EG2 is not displayed, and then the moving image is displayed. The display in which the effect image EG2 is superimposed on the effect effect character CH2 is displayed over a plurality of frames. In the following step S1502, the parameter information of the character still image data SD grasped in step S1501 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is secured in the work RAM 73 in correspondence with the character still image data SD. Update the control information by writing to the area.

In the following step S1503, it is determined whether or not the effect image data ED1 should be applied based on the currently set execution target table. When it is necessary to apply the effect image data ED1, in step S1504, the effect image data ED1 of the type corresponding to the update timing of the current frame is grasped as a display target. In the following step S1505, the parameter information of the effect image data ED1 grasped in step S1504 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is transferred to the area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to the effect image data ED1. Update the control information by writing. After that, in step S1506, the effect generation designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the effect image data ED1 should be used is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

In the following step S1507, whether or not it is the execution timing of the partial addition process, which is a process for suppressing the occurrence of overexposure when applying the effect image data ED1, is determined based on the currently set execution target table. judge. When it is the execution timing of the partial addition process, in step S1508, the partial addition designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the partial addition process should be executed is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503, a negative determination is made in step S1507, or the process of step S1508 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1509. In step S1509, effect effect designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the effect effect should be executed is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

When the arithmetic processing for effect production is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609) includes a still image for characters corresponding to the update timing of the current frame. When the data SD is set as a drawing target and the effect image EG2 is displayed, the effect image data ED1 is set as a drawing target. Further, in the drawing list, parameter information applied to the still image data SD for characters and the image data ED1 for effects is set. In addition, effect effect designation information is set in the drawing list, effect generation designation information is set during the display period of the effect image EG2, and partial addition designation information is set at the execution timing of the partial addition process. Set. At the start timing of the effect effect, the information of the address where the still image data SD for the character is stored in the memory module 74 and the information of the address where the image data ED1 for the effect is stored are designated in the drawing list. Will be done.

Next, the setting process for effect effect and the write process for effect effect executed by VDP76 will be described. The setting process for the effect effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1104 of the drawing process (FIG. 23), and the writing process for the effect effect is the step of the drawing process (FIG. 23). It is executed as a part of the writing process executed in S1105. Further, when the effect effect designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the effect effect and the write process for the effect effect are executed. Here, in the drawing list, since the effect effect designation information is set in association with the image data for the effect, the setting process for the effect effect and the write process for the effect effect are for the effect in this drawing list. It is started when the drawing order of the image data of is reached.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a setting process for effect production.

In step S1601, the address of the area where the still image data SD for the character to be drawn this time, which is shown in the drawing list, is read in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 is grasped. At the start timing of the effect effect, the character still image data SD and the effect image data ED1 used in the effect effect are read from the memory module 74 and written in a predetermined area of the expansion buffer 81. In the following step S1602, the parameter information applied to the still image data SD for the character to be drawn this time is grasped.

When the effect generation designation information is set in the drawing list (step S1603: YES), in step S1604, the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time shown in the drawing list is the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Grasp the address of the area read in. After that, in step S1605, the parameter information applied to the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time is grasped.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a writing process for effect production.

First, the still image data SD for the character to be drawn this time is drawn on the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. This drawing is performed with reference to the coordinates specified in the drawing list in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn (step S1701).

When the effect generation designation information is set in the drawing list (step S1702: YES), the process for applying the effect image data ED1 is executed in steps S1703 to S1712. Specifically, first, in step S1703, a value corresponding to the total number of pixels in the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time is set in the write processing counter provided in the register 92. After that, in step S1704, it is determined whether or not the partial addition designation information is set in the drawing list. When the partial addition designation information is set, the addition process shown in steps S1709 to S1711 is executed after the setting process for partial addition shown in steps S1705 to S1708 is executed. If the partial addition designation information is not set, the addition process is executed without executing the setting process for the partial addition.

A case where the addition process is executed without executing the setting process for partial addition will be described. First, in the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time, each RGB color information set in the pixel corresponding to the current write processing counter value and the α value are integrated (step S1709). Then, the color information of the integration result is added to each RGB color information stored in the dots corresponding to the values of the current write processing counter in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn (step S1710). After that, the value of the write processing counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1711). As a result, the integration result of the color information set in the corresponding pixel of the effect image data ED1 and the α value is added as it is to the color information set in the pixel of the still image data SD for the character. ..

A case where the addition process is executed after the setting process for partial addition is executed will be described. In the setting process for partial addition, first, each RGB color information set in the pixel corresponding to the value of the current write processing counter in the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time is read out (step S1705). Then, each of the read color information is inverted (step S1706). At the time of this inversion, the read color information is subtracted from the maximum value of the color information "255" for each of RGB. Further, the value of the inverted result, that is, the value of the result of subtracting the read color information from "255" is divided by "255" which is the maximum value of the color information (step S1707). After that, the value of the division result is integrated with each RGB color information stored in the dots corresponding to the values of the current write processing counters in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn (step S1708).

In this case, since the division result is "1" for the pixels for which "0" is set as the color information in the effect image data ED1, the division results are integrated in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. The dot color information does not change. On the other hand, for pixels in which a value of 1 or more is set as color information in the effect image data ED1, the above division result is a value less than 1. In the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, the color information of the dots obtained by integrating the division results of the values less than 1 is smaller than the initially set value.

After that, in the effect image data ED1 to be drawn this time, each RGB color information set in the pixels corresponding to the current write processing counter value and the α value are integrated (step S1709). Then, the color information of the integration result is added to each RGB color information stored in the dots corresponding to the values of the current write processing counter in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn (step S1710). After that, in step S1711, the value of the write processing counter is subtracted by 1, and in step S1712, it is determined whether or not the value of the write processing counter after the subtraction is "0". If it is not "0", the pixel writing process corresponding to the value of the write processing counter after subtraction is executed, and if it is "0", the writing process for this effect effect is terminated as it is. ..

By executing the setting process for partial addition as described above, the color information of the still image data SD for characters already drawn in each unit area 121 of the frame areas 82a and 82b is reduced to a small value. As a result, it is possible to reduce the value of the color information in the unit area 121 to which the effect image data ED1 is added in the state before the addition process is executed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overexposure.

This reduction is performed by integrating the value obtained by inverting each color information of the effect image data ED1 by the maximum value of the color information, and therefore, in each unit area 121 of the frame areas 82a and 82b, The unit area 121 in which the color information of the applied effect image data ED1 is larger is greatly reduced in color information (that is, smaller values are integrated). As a result, the amount of prior reduction of color information becomes larger as the unit area 121 to which the pixel of large color information is applied in the effect image data ED1, and the color information of the unit area 121 having a high possibility of overexposure is emphasized. It is possible to reduce the amount in advance. Therefore, in the unit area 121 where the possibility of overexposure is low, it is possible to suppress the reduction amount of the color information set by the still image data SD for the character, and the display content of the character CH2 for effect production is maintained as much as possible. It becomes possible.

The reduction of the color information according to the content of the color information of the effect image data ED1 is performed by using the effect image data ED1. As a result, the data required for storing the image data in the memory module 74 is compared with the configuration in which the image data for partial addition different from the effect image data ED1 is stored in the memory module 74 in advance. It is possible to reduce the capacity.

<Another form of configuration related to effect production>
-Instead of the configuration in which the color information is reduced by using the effect image data ED1, the reduction data different from the effect image data ED1 is stored in the memory module 74 in advance, and the reduction data is stored. It may be configured to reduce the color information by applying it to the still image data SD for characters. In this case, the amount of reduction of the reduction data is reduced at the location where the data corresponding to the relatively bright color information is applied in the effect image data ED1 as compared with the location where the data corresponding to the relatively dark color information is applied. By setting so as to be large, it is possible to reduce the color information in a manner corresponding to the data content of the effect image data ED1 as in the above embodiment.

-In the color information set by the character still image data SD, the color information is reduced at the place where the color information equal to or higher than the predetermined value in the effect image data ED1 is set, while the character still image data SD In the color information set by the above, the color information may not be reduced at the portion where the color information equal to or larger than the predetermined value in the effect image data ED1 is not set.

-Color information for the part where the color information of the pixel for which the completely transparent α value (specifically, "0") in the effect image data ED1 is set in the still image data SD for characters is set. May be configured so that the reduction is not performed. In this case, even if the effect image data ED1 is added, the part where the overexposure does not occur can be excluded from the reduction target of the color information, and the image is displayed with the content that should be displayed originally. Is possible.

-The target for reducing the color information corresponding to the color information of each pixel set in the effect image data ED1 is not limited to the color information set by the character still image data SD, and the character. Both the color information set by the still image data SD for effect and the color information set in the image data ED1 for effect may be used, and the color information set by the still image data SD for character may be reduced. Instead, only the color information set in the effect image data ED1 may be reduced.

The color information set by the still image data SD for characters may be reduced in correspondence with the color information set by the still image data SD for characters, and the colors set by the still image data SD for characters may be reduced. The color information set in the effect image data ED1 may be reduced in correspondence with the information.

<Structure for performing development production>
Next, the configuration for performing the development effect will be described with reference to FIG. 33. 33 (a) to 33 (e) are explanatory views for explaining the development effect.

With the development effect, the type of effect image applied changes as the effect progresses, and the type of effect image increases so that the content of the overall effect image becomes flashy in stages. It is a production. Specifically, during the first stage of the development effect, the first effect image EG3 in which light rays are emitted from the center to the outside is displayed as a moving image as shown in FIG. 33 (a), and the first effect image EG3 in the development effect is displayed. In the two-stage production period, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the second effect image EG4 in which the particles move from the center to the outside is displayed as a moving image, and in the third stage production period in the development production, FIG. As shown in 33 (c), both the first effect image EG3 and the second effect image EG4 are displayed as a moving image in a superposed state, and as shown in FIG. 33 (d) during the fourth stage of the development effect. In addition to the first effect image EG3 and the second effect image EG4, the third effect image EG5 in which the ring of light expands from the center side to the outside is displayed as a moving image.

The development effect is executed as an effect for game rounds, and the higher the stage is, the higher the expectation of the reach display or the occurrence of the jackpot result. That is, when it ends only in the first stage, when it is executed and finished up to the second stage after the first stage, when it is executed and finished up to the third stage after the first stage to the second stage, and when it ends. Each of the cases where the fourth stage is executed after the stage to the third stage and ends is set as the execution pattern of the development effect, and the above expectation is the case where the development effect of the later execution pattern is executed. Will be higher.

In the development effect, the display contents of the effect images EG3 to EG5 are changed in a plurality of stages as described above, but in the development effect, the effect stored in advance in the memory module 74 in order to display the effect images EG3 to EG5. The number of image data ED2 to ED4 for use is smaller than the number of stages of development production. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33 (e), the memory module 74 is composed of the image data ED2 for the first effect and the image data ED3 for the second effect as image data for executing the development effect. The effect image data ED4 is stored in advance.

The image data ED2 for the first effect is image data for displaying only the first effect image EG3 out of the effect images EG3 to EG5 of the development effect, and the first effect image EG3 is predetermined in the first stage effect period. A plurality of them are provided so that they can be changed in the above manner. The first effect image data ED2 is the first to enable the data for displaying the first effect image EG3 as an individual image and the image by the first effect image data ED2 to be treated as a rectangular image. It includes data in a frame area set to surround the effect image EG3. Since the pixels constituting the first effect image EG3 have a semitransparent α value (0 <α value <1), they are displayed on the display surface P, but the pixels constituting the frame area are completely displayed. Since the transparent α value is set, it is not displayed on the display surface P.

The image data ED3 for the second effect is image data for displaying only the second effect image EG4 out of the effect images EG3 to EG5 of the development effect, and the second effect image EG4 is predetermined in the effect period of the second stage. A plurality of them are provided so that they can be changed in the above manner. The second effect image data ED3 is used to enable the data for displaying the second effect image EG4 as an individual image and the image by the second effect image data ED3 to be treated as a rectangular image. It includes data in a frame area set to surround the effect image EG4. Since the pixels constituting the second effect image EG4 are set with a semi-transparent α value (0 <α value <1), they are displayed on the display surface P, but the pixels constituting the frame area are completely displayed. Since the transparent α value is set, it is not displayed on the display surface P.

The image data ED4 for the composite effect is image data for displaying all of the effect images EG3 to EG5 of the development effect, and is the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG4 in the fourth stage effect period. A plurality of effect images EG5 are provided so that they can be changed in a predetermined manner. The composite effect image data ED4 uses data for displaying the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 as individual images, and the composite effect image data ED4 as a rectangular image. It includes data in a frame area set to surround the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 so as to be able to handle them. Since the pixels constituting the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 are set with a translucent α value (0 <α value <1), they are displayed on the display surface P. However, since the pixels constituting the frame area are set with a completely transparent α value, they are not displayed on the display surface P.

Here, as image data for displaying the effect images EG3 to EG5 of the development effect, only the image data ED2 for the first effect, the image data ED3 for the second effect, and the image data ED4 for the composite effect are stored in advance. In, the effect image data corresponding to the third stage production period does not exist. On the other hand, in the third stage production period, both the first effect image data ED2 and the second effect image data ED3 are used, so that the first effect image EG3 and the second effect image EG4 The video is displayed with both superimposed.

A state in which the development effect is executed using the image data ED2 to ED4 for each effect will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 34. FIG. 34 (a) shows the usage period of the first effect image data ED2, FIG. 34 (b) shows the usage period of the second effect image data ED3, and FIG. 34 (c) shows the composite effect image data ED4. Indicates the period of use of.

In the first stage production period executed from the timing of t1 to the second timing, the image data ED2 for the first effect is used as shown in FIG. 34 (a), and the image data ED3 for the second effect and the image data ED3 for the second effect and The image data ED4 for the composite effect is not used. In the second stage production period executed from the timing of t2 to the third timing, the second effect image data ED3 is used as shown in FIG. 34 (b), and the first effect image data ED2 and The image data ED4 for the composite effect is not used.

In the third stage effect period executed from the timing of t3 to the fourth timing, the image data for the first effect ED2 and the image for the second effect are shown as shown in FIGS. 34 (a) and 34 (b). Both data ED3 are used, and image data ED4 for compositing effect is not used. In the fourth stage production period executed from the timing of t4 to the fifth timing, the image data ED4 for the composite effect is used as shown in FIG. 34 (c), and the image data ED2 for the first effect and the image data ED2 for the first effect are used. 2 Effect image data ED3 is not used.

The specific processing configuration for executing the development effect will be described below. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for development effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the development effect is executed in the effect operation process of step S909 in the task process (FIG. 19). The arithmetic processing for the development effect is started when the information about the development effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

When it is the start timing of the development effect (step S1801: YES), the addresses of the first effect image data ED2, the second effect image data ED3, and the composite effect image data ED4 in the memory module 74 are grasped (step S1801: YES). Step S1802). Then, in step S1803, the development effect start designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the development effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

In the case of the first stage production period (step S1804: YES), the image data ED2 for the first effect of the type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S1805). .. Further, the parameter information of the image data ED2 for the first effect is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to the image data ED2 for the first effect in the work RAM 73 for control. Information is updated (step S1806). After that, in step S1807, the first stage designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is the first stage effect period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

In the case of the second stage production period (step S1808: YES), the image data ED3 for the second effect of the type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S1809). .. Further, the parameter information of the second effect image data ED3 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to the second effect image data ED3 in the work RAM 73 for control. Information is updated (step S1810). After that, in step S1811, the second stage designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is the second stage production period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

In the case of the third stage production period (step S1812: YES), the image data ED2 for the first effect of the type corresponding to the update timing this time is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S1813). ), The image data ED3 for the second effect of the type corresponding to the update timing this time is grasped (step S1814). Further, the parameter information of the image data ED2 for the first effect and the image data ED3 for the second effect is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is used in the work RAM 73 for the image data ED2 for the first effect and the image for the second effect. The control information is updated by writing in the area secured corresponding to the data ED3 (step S1815). After that, in step S1816, the third stage designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is the third stage effect period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

If it is not the third stage production period (step S1812: NO), it means that it is the fourth stage production period, so the process proceeds to step S1817. In step S1817, the image data ED4 for the composite effect of the type corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. Further, the parameter information of the composite effect image data ED4 is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to the composite effect image data ED4 in the work RAM 73 for control information. Is updated (step S1818). After that, in step S1819, the fourth stage designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is the fourth stage production period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

When the arithmetic processing for development effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609) includes the effect image data corresponding to the update timing of the current frame. ED2 to ED4 are set as drawing targets. Further, in the drawing list, parameter information applied to the effect image data ED2 to ED4 to be drawn is set. In addition, any of the first stage designation information, the second stage designation information, the third stage designation information, and the fourth stage designation information is set in the drawing list according to the current production period, and further development production is started. At the timing, the development production start designation information is set.

Next, the setting process for development effect executed by VDP76 will be described. The setting process for the development effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1104 of the drawing process (FIG. 23). Further, when any of the first to fourth stage designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the development effect is executed. Here, in the drawing list, since the first to fourth effect designation information is set in association with the image data for the effect, the setting process for the development effect is the image data for the effect in the drawing list of this time. It is started when the drawing order of is reached.

When the development effect start designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S1901: YES), the image data ED2 for each first effect is stored in the memory module 74 from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The address, the address where the image data ED3 for each second effect is stored, and the address where the image data ED4 for each composite effect is stored are grasped, and the effect image is grasped from the memory module 74 based on the grasped result. All of the data ED2 to ED4 are read into the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 (step S1902).

When the first stage designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S1903: YES), in step S1904, the image data ED2 for the first effect shown in the drawing list is used for expanding the VRAM 75. The address of the area read in the buffer 81 is grasped. In the following step S1905, the parameter information applied to the image data ED2 for the first effect this time is grasped.

When the second stage designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S1906: YES), in step S1907, the image data ED3 for the second effect shown in the drawing list is used for expanding the VRAM 75. The address of the area read in the buffer 81 is grasped. In the following step S1908, the parameter information applied to the image data ED3 for the second effect this time is grasped.

When the third stage designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S1909: YES), in step S1910, the image data ED2 for the first effect shown in the drawing list is used for expanding the VRAM 75. The address of the area read in the buffer 81 is grasped, and in step S1911, the image data ED3 for the second effect shown in the drawing list is read in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Know the address of the area you are in. In the following step S1912, the parameter information applied to the image data ED2 for the first effect and the image data ED3 for the second effect is grasped.

If the first to third stage designation information is not set in the drawing list this time (step S1909: NO), it means that it is the fourth stage production period, so the process proceeds to step S1913. In step S1913, the address of the area where the image data ED4 for the present synthesis effect shown in the drawing list is read in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 is grasped. In the following step S1914, the parameter information applied to the image data ED4 for the composite effect this time is grasped.

By executing the setting process for the development effect, the effect image data ED2 to ED4 to be drawn provide parameter information to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the subsequent writing process (step S1105). It is drawn in the applied state.

In the third stage production period in which both the first effect image EG3 and the second effect image EG4 are superposed and displayed as a moving image, the composite effect image data in which both effect images EG3 and EG4 are collectively set is displayed. Instead of preparing in advance, the image data ED2 for the first effect to be drawn in the production period of the first stage and the image data ED3 for the second effect to be drawn in the production period of the second stage are used. With the configuration, it is possible to reduce the data capacity required for storing the effect image data in advance. On the other hand, for the fourth stage production period in which the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 are displayed at the same time, the composite effect in which the effect images EG3 to EG5 are collectively set is set. Image data ED4 for use is prepared in advance. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load as compared with the configuration in which each effect image EG3 to EG5 is displayed at the same time by using three types of effect image data. That is, according to the above configuration, it is possible to perform an effect of gradually increasing the number of types of effect images EG3 to EG5 while balancing the storage capacity of the memory module 74 and the processing load.

<Another form of composition related to development production>
The effect image data for displaying the third effect image EG5 may be stored in the memory module 74 in advance. In this case, the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 can be individually displayed in different display periods, and one composite effect image data ED4 is used. It is possible to display the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5 at the same time. Further, in this configuration, it is possible to display an image of any combination of two of the first effect image EG3, the second effect image EG4, and the third effect image EG5.

<Structure for simultaneous display effect>
Next, the configuration for performing the simultaneous display effect will be described.

The simultaneous display effect is a timing at which the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 displayed at the same time increases in the middle and the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 further increases, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 37 (a). This is an effect in which the display of the effect image EG6 for increasing is started. The effect image EG6 for increasing time is an image in which waves propagate from the center to the outside. The effect image EG6 for increasing time is displayed so as to change in a predetermined mode from the timing when the numbers of the effect characters CH3 to CH7 increase at the same time to the update timing of a plurality of frames in a predetermined period.

As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 37B, the normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 are stored in advance in the memory module 74 as image data for displaying the effect image EG6 for increasing time. ing. Although both the normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 are image data for displaying the increasing effect image EG6, the simple effect image data ED6 is larger than the normal effect image data ED5. The difference is that the number of pixels is small. Further, since the normal effect image data ED5 has the same number of pixels as the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7, the simple effect image data ED6 displays the effect characters CH3 to CH7. It can be said that the number of pixels is smaller than that of the image data of.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 37 (c-1) and 37 (c-2), the number of pixels of the simple effect image data ED6 is half that of the normal effect image data ED5. There is. Therefore, in order to display the effect image EG6 for increasing with the same size, when the simple effect image data ED6 is the drawing target, the scale is larger than when the normal effect image data ED5 is the drawing target. It is necessary to double the information of.

While only one image data ED6 for simple effects is provided, the image data ED5 for normal effects changes the effect image EG6 for increasing in a predetermined mode in a predetermined period over the update timing of a plurality of frames. Multiple are provided so that it is possible. When displaying the effect image EG6 for increasing time, as will be described in detail later, the simple effect image data ED6 is used first, and then a plurality of normal effect image data ED5s are used. In this case, the increasing effect image displayed by the simple effect image data ED6 so that the increasing effect image EG6 can be changed in a predetermined manner in a predetermined period over the update timings of the plurality of frames. The display mode of the increasing effect image EG6 displayed by the first normal effect image data ED5 in the order of use among the plurality of normal effect image data ED5 has continuity with respect to the display mode of the EG6. ..

The image data ED5 for normal effects and the image data ED6 for simple effects are data for displaying the effect image EG6 for increasing, and the image by the image data ED5 for normal effects and the image data ED6 for simple effects as a rectangular image. It includes data in a frame area set to surround the augmentation effect image EG6 so that it can be handled. Since a semi-transparent α value (0 <α value <1) is set for the pixels constituting the effect image EG6 for increase, it is displayed on the display surface P, but the pixels constituting the frame area are displayed. Since a completely transparent α value is set, it is not a display target on the display surface P.

The state in which the normal effect image data ED5 and the simple effect image data ED6 are properly used as the image data for displaying the effect image EG6 for increasing time will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 38. FIG. 38 (a) shows a minority display period in which the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 displayed at the same time is small, and FIG. 38 (b) shows a period in which the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 displayed at the same time is large. 38 (c) shows the period during which the simple effect image data ED6 is used as the image data for displaying the effect image EG6 for increasing, and FIG. 38 (d) shows the period for increasing. The period during which the normal effect image data ED5 is used as the image data for displaying the effect image EG6 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the minority display period extends from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2. In the minority display period, as shown in FIG. 38A, there are only two effect characters CH3 and CH4 displayed on the display surface P.

When the minority display period ends at the timing of t2, the majority display period starts as shown in FIG. 38 (b). At the timing when the multiple display period starts, the number of effect characters CH3 to CH7 displayed on the display surface P increases to 5 as shown in FIG. 38 (B), and the effect image EG6 for increase is displayed. Is started. In this case, at the timing of t2, which is the start timing of the multiple display period, the simple effect image data ED6 is used as the image data for displaying the effect image EG6 for increasing as shown in FIG. 38 (c). .. As a result, in a configuration in which a plurality of image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7 are read out at the start timing of the multiple display period, the time required for reading out the image data for displaying the effect image EG6 for increase is shortened. Is planned. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the reading period of the image data at the start timing of the multi-display period, and increase the production characters CH3 to CH7 to be displayed at the start timing of the multi-display period and display the effect image EG6 for increasing. Both the start and the start can be preferably performed. Further, according to this configuration, it is necessary to read a large number of image data for displaying the effect image EG6 at the time of increase from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 at a timing before the start of the display period. Therefore, there is no need to set a program for advance transfer.

The state in which the simple effect image data ED6 is used as the image data for displaying the increasing effect image EG6 is continued over the update timing of a plurality of frames. After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIGS. 38 (c) and 38 (d), the image data for displaying the effect image EG6 for increasing is changed from the image data ED6 for simple effect to the image data ED5 for normal effect. Can be switched. As a result, it is possible to improve the image quality of the effect image EG6 for increasing time compared to the period during which the image data ED6 for simple effects is used. After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIGS. 38 (b) and 38 (d), the multiple display period ends and the display of the increasing effect image EG6 using the normal effect image data ED5 ends.

A specific processing configuration for executing the simultaneous display effect will be described below. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for simultaneous display effect executed by the display CPU 72. The arithmetic processing for the simultaneous display effect is executed in the effect arithmetic process in step S909 in the task process (FIG. 19). The arithmetic processing for the simultaneous display effect is started when the information about the simultaneous display effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

When it is the minority display period (step S2001: YES), it is determined in step S2002 whether or not it is the start timing of the minority display period. When it is the start timing of the minority display period (step S2002: YES), each address in the memory module 74 of the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 and CH4 to be displayed in the minority display period is grasped (step S2003). ). Then, in step S2004, the minority display start designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the minority display period of the simultaneous display effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

When a negative determination is made in step S2002 or when the process of step S2004 is executed, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S2005). Further, the parameter information of the image data is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to the image data in the work RAM 73 to update the control information (step S2006). .. After that, in step S2007, the minority display designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is the minority display period is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

In the case of a large number display period (step S2001: NO), it is determined in step S2008 whether or not it is the start timing of the large number display period. When it is the start timing of the large number display period (step S2008: YES), the memory module of the image data for displaying the effect characters CH5, CH6, CH7 for which the display is started in the large number display period and the image data ED6 for the simple effect. Each address in 74 is grasped (step S2009). Then, in step S2010, the multi-display start designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the multi-display period of the simultaneous display effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

In the case of a large number display period and a simple display period (step S2001: NO, step S2011: YES), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is displayed based on the currently set execution target table. Grasp (step S2012). In this case, the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7 to be displayed in the large number of display periods and the image data ED6 for simple effects are grasped. Further, the parameter information of the image data is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to the image data in the work RAM 73 to update the control information (step S2013). .. After that, in step S2014, the simple display designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is the simple display period in which the simple effect image data ED6 is used as the image data for displaying the increasing effect image EG6 is displayed CPU72. Store in the register of.

On the other hand, if it is not a simple display period, that is, if it is a normal display period in which the normal effect image data ED5 is used as the image data for displaying the increasing effect image EG6 (step S2011: NO), in step S2015. It is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the normal display period. When it is the start timing of the normal display period (step S2015: YES), the addresses in the memory module 74 for all of the plurality of normal effect image data ED5 are grasped (step S2016). Then, in step S2017, the normal display start designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that the normal display period should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 72.

In the case of a large number of display periods and a normal display period (step S2001: NO, step S2011: NO), based on the currently set execution target table, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is displayed. Grasp (step S2018). In this case, the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7 to be displayed in the multiple display period and the image data ED5 for the normal effect are grasped. Further, the parameter information of the image data is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to the image data in the work RAM 73 to update the control information (step S2019). .. After that, in step S2020, the normal display designation information for causing the VDP 76 to recognize that it is the normal display period in which the normal effect image data ED5 is used as the image data for displaying the increasing effect image EG6 is displayed CPU72. Store in the register of.

When the arithmetic processing for the simultaneous display effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609) includes the effect character corresponding to the update timing of the current frame. Image data for displaying CH3 to CH7 is set as a drawing target. Further, in the case of a large number of display periods, either the simple effect image data ED6 or the normal effect image data ED5 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. In this case, for the normal effect image data ED6, the type of normal effect image data ED6 corresponding to the corresponding update timing is set as the drawing target. In addition, parameter information applied to the image data to be drawn is set in the drawing list. In addition, one of the minority display designation information, the simple display designation information, and the normal display designation information is set in the drawing list according to the current production period, and the minority display start designation information is set at the start timing of each display period. , One of the multi-display start designation information and the normal display start designation information is set.

Next, the setting process for simultaneous display effect executed by VDP76 will be described. The setting process for the simultaneous display effect is executed as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S1104 of the drawing process (FIG. 23). Further, when any of the minority display designation information, the simple display designation information, and the normal display designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the simultaneous display effect is executed. Here, in the drawing list, the minority display designation information, the simple display designation information, and the normal display designation information are set in association with the image data for the effect, so that the setting process for the simultaneous display effect is the drawing list of this time. Of these, it is activated when the drawing order of the image data for production is reached.

When the minority display designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S2101: YES), it is determined in step S2102 whether or not the minority display start designation information is further set in the drawing list. When the minority display start designation information is set (step S2102: YES), the effect characters CH3 and CH4 to be displayed in the memory module 74 during the minority display period based on the address information set in the drawing list. The address of the area where the image data for displaying is stored is grasped, and all of these image data are read out from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 based on the grasped result (step S2103).

Further, when the minority display designation information is set (step S2101: YES), in step S2104, the area in which the current image data shown in the drawing list is read in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Know the address of. In the following step S2105, the parameter information applied to the current image data is grasped.

When a large number display start designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S2106: YES), display is started in the memory module 74 in a large number display period from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The address of the area where the image data for displaying the effect characters CH5, CH6, and CH7 is stored is grasped, and all of these image data are read out from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 based on the grasped result. (Step S2107).

Further, from the address information set in the drawing list this time, the address of the area where the image data ED6 for simple effects is stored in the memory module 74 is grasped, and based on the grasped result, the memory module 74 is used for simple effects. The image data ED6 is read into the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 (step S2108). Then, in step S2109, the read-out simple effect image data ED6 is enlarged. In the enlargement processing, the number of pixels is increased while performing color information interpolation processing on the simple effect image data ED6, so that the number of pixels becomes the same as the number of pixels of the normal effect image data ED5 after the enlargement processing. Image data for effects is created and written to the expansion buffer 81.

Here, the processing time required for the enlargement processing is the time required to read one normal effect image data ED5 from the memory module 74 and the time required to read one simple effect image data ED6 from the memory module 74. The time is shorter than the time difference from the required time. As a result, even if the enlargement processing is executed for the simple effect image data ED6, the processing time is shortened as compared with the case where the normal effect image data ED5 is read at the start timing of the large number of display periods. It becomes possible.

On the other hand, when the normal display start designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S2110: YES), the image data ED5 for the normal effect is stored in the memory module 74 from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The address is grasped, and based on the grasped result, all of the normal effect image data ED5 is read from the memory module 74 into the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 (step S2111).

When the simple display designation information or the normal display designation information is set in the current drawing list, the current image data shown in the drawing list is read out in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 in step S2112. Know the address of the area you are in. In this case, if it is a simple display period, the address of the area where the effect image data after the enlargement processing is written is grasped in the expansion buffer 81. On the other hand, during the normal display period, the address of the area in which the normal effect image data ED5 corresponding to the current update timing is read is grasped in the expansion buffer 81. In the following step S2113, the parameter information applied to the current image data is grasped.

By executing the setting process for the simultaneous display effect, in the subsequent write process (step S1105), the effect characters CH3 to CH7 to be drawn are displayed on the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. The image data of is drawn with the parameter information applied. Further, in the simple display period, the effect image data after enlargement processing is drawn as image data for displaying the effect image EG6 for increase in a state where parameter information is applied, and in the normal display period, for increase. The normal effect image data ED5 for displaying the effect image EG6 is drawn with the parameter information applied.

At the start timing of the multiple display period, the simple effect image data ED6 is used as the image data for displaying the increasing effect image EG6. As a result, in a configuration in which a plurality of image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7 are read out at the start timing of the multiple display period, the time required for reading out the image data for displaying the effect image EG6 for increase is shortened. Is planned. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the reading period of the image data at the start timing of the multi-display period, and increase the production characters CH3 to CH7 to be displayed at the start timing of the multi-display period and display the effect image EG6 for increasing. Both the start and the start can be preferably performed. Further, according to this configuration, it is necessary to read a large number of image data for displaying the effect image EG6 at the time of increase from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 at a timing before the start of the display period. Therefore, there is no need to set a program for advance transfer.

The image data in which the number of pixels is set to be small in order to shorten the time required to read the image data is not the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7, but the effect image EG6 for increasing time is displayed. It is the image data of. As a result, it is possible to preferably display the image at the start timing of the multiple display period while not deteriorating the image quality of the effect characters CH3 to CH7, which are conspicuous as the image display.

When the multiple display period has progressed to some extent, the image data for displaying the effect image EG6 for increasing is changed from the image data ED6 for simple effects to the image data ED5 for normal effects. As a result, it is possible to make the image quality of the effect image EG6 for increasing time suitable from the middle of the multiple display period.

The image data for simple effects ED6 is enlarged at the timing when it is read out, and the image data for effects after the enlargement processing is used in the subsequent simple display period. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load as compared with the configuration in which the enlargement processing is executed every time during the simple display period.

<Another form of configuration related to simultaneous display production>
-The image data ED6 for simple effects may be provided as the image data for displaying the effect image EG6 for increasing, but the image data ED5 for normal effects may not be provided. Even in this case, it is possible to display the effect image ED6 for increasing time while shortening the time required for reading the image data at the start timing of the multiple display period. In this configuration, the enlargement processing is executed so that the simple effect image data ED6 has the same resolution as the image data for displaying the effect characters CH3 to CH7.

-The image data ED6 for simple effects is set to half the resolution of the image data ED5 for normal effects, but it is not limited to this, for example, as a configuration set to 1/4 resolution. It may be a configuration set to a resolution of 1/3, or a configuration set to a resolution of 2/3.

The simple effect image data ED6 may be configured to have a period in which the image data ED6 is expanded and used as in the above embodiment and a period in which the image data ED6 is used with the resolution stored in the memory module 74. For example, when the effect image EG6 for increasing is displayed by using the entire display surface P, the image data ED6 for simple effects is enlarged and used, and a part of the display surface P is set to be partitioned. When the effect image EG6 for increasing is displayed within the range within the divided area, the simple effect image data ED6 may be used at the same resolution.

-Instead of the configuration in which only one image data ED6 for simple effects is provided, a configuration in which a plurality of image data ED6s for simple effects are provided may be provided. As a result, even when the effect image EG6 for increasing is displayed by using the image data ED6 for simple effects, it is possible to change the display mode of the effect image EG6 for increasing. In this configuration, all the simple effect image data ED6 are not read out at the same time when the display of the increasing effect image EG6 using the simple effect image data ED6 is started, but are used at each update timing. It is preferable that the target simple effect image data ED6 is individually read out, and the read-out simple effect image data ED6 is subjected to an enlargement process (step S2109).

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the electrical configuration related to display control is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration in the present embodiment.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 41, the main control device 50 is provided as in the first embodiment. Further, the main control device 50 has a payout control device 55 that controls the payout device 56, and a power supply that functions to supply electric power to each device including the main control device 50 and drives and controls the game ball launch mechanism 58. The launch control device 57, the special figure unit 37 that displays the result of the game round, and the normal figure unit 38 that displays the result of the public electric power opening lottery are electrically connected. Further, a voice emission control device 60 for driving and controlling the display light emission unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 50 is provided, and the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 60 is further provided. A display control device 130 that controls the symbol display device 41 based on the symbol display device 41 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 41, the display control device 130 includes a display control board 136 on which a display CPU 131, a work RAM 132, a memory module 133, a VRAM 134, and a video display processor (VDP) 135 are mounted. ..

The display CPU 131 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 130, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program or the like. Specifically, the display CPU 131 is connected to the input port 137 mounted on the display control board 136 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the voice emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 131 through the input port 137. Will be done.

The display CPU 131 is connected to the work RAM 132, the memory module 133, and the VRAM 134 via a bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 based on a command received from the voice emission control device 60. Give a transfer instruction. Further, the display CPU 131 is connected to the VDP 135 via a bus, and gives a drawing instruction for displaying a three-dimensional image (3D image) on the symbol display device 41 based on a command received from the voice emission control device 60. Do. Hereinafter, the memory module 133, the work RAM 132, the VRAM 134, and the VDP 135 will be described.

The memory module 133 is a storage means that stores control programs and control data including fixed value data in advance, and stores various image data for displaying a three-dimensional image in advance. The memory module 133 includes a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage retention. By the way, the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, but such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is performed well. Further, the memory module 133 is used as a non-writing and read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The various image data stored in the memory module 133 include object data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 41, texture data pasted on the object data, and the backmost image in one frame of the image. The image data for the back surface that constitutes the image of the above is included.

Here, the object data is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in the world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. Further, the polygon is a polygonal plane defined by a plurality of vertices having three-dimensional coordinates. For example, in order to apply a surface model to the object data, the vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with the reference coordinates set in advance for each object data as the origin. That is, in each object data, the relative position (that is, the direction and size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in the self-contained local coordinate system.

The texture data is an image to be pasted on each polygon of the object data, and when the texture data is pasted on the object data, an image corresponding to the object data, for example, a display image including a pattern or a character is generated. The way of holding the texture data is arbitrary, but includes at least a combination of, for example, bitmap format data and a color palette referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image.

The rearmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image (2D image). The way of holding the image data for the back surface is arbitrary, but for example, the two-dimensional still image data is stored and held as JPEG format data in a compressed state. By the way, when the image data for the back surface is arranged in the world coordinate system, the plate-shaped object data (that is, the plate polygon) is used.

The work RAM 132 is a storage means for temporarily storing the control data read from the memory module 133 and transferred, and for temporarily storing the flags and the like. The work RAM 132 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storage, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. The storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the work RAM 132 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 131 to the memory module 133. Then, the display CPU 131 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 132 into the internal memory area (register group) as needed, and executes various processes.

The VRAM 134 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 134 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires power supply from the outside for storage, and in detail, SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. The storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 130 is satisfactorily executed. Further, the VRAM 134 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 134 includes an expansion buffer 141, and image data is transferred from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 135 to the memory module 133. Further, the VRAM 134 is provided with a frame buffer 142 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 135.

The VDP 135 is an image generation device that draws on the symbol display device 41 by specifically processing the data stored and held in the expansion buffer 141 based on the drawing instruction from the display CPU 131. This is a kind of drawing circuit that operates an image processing device 41b incorporated so as to drive and control a liquid crystal display unit 41a in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP135 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing.

Specifically, the VDP 135 includes a geometry calculation unit 151, a rendering unit 152, a register 153, and a display circuit 155. Further, these circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to the I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 and the I / F 157 for the VRAM 134.

The I / F 156 for the display CPU 131 stores the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 131 in the register 153. The geometry calculation unit 151 reads various image data stored in the memory module 133 into the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 based on the drawing list stored in the register 153. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 arranges the object data designated as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 executes various coordinate conversion processes when arranging the object data in the world coordinate system and after arranging the object data. Finally, the object is clipped so as to correspond to the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface P.

The rendering unit 152 determines the appearance of the object data by adjusting the light source and pasting the texture data to each of the clipped object data based on the drawing list stored in the register 153. Further, the rendering unit 152 creates the two-dimensional data by projecting each object data on a predetermined two-dimensional plane, and makes various adjustments based on the depth information to frame the drawing data for one frame which is the two-dimensional data. Create in buffer 142. The drawing data for one frame is the data required to display the image at one update timing in the configuration in which the image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

In addition, all the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be provided by the drawing list, and the memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the VDP 135, and the control program and the drawing list are provided. The geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may execute the processing depending on the contents of the above. Further, the control program may be read in advance from the memory module 133. Further, the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152 may be configured to execute the process only by the operation of the hard circuit corresponding to the drawing list without using the program.

Here, the frame buffer 142 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 142a and 142b. Specifically, a first frame area 142a and a second frame area 142b are provided. Each of these frame areas 142a and 142b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame areas 142a and 142b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, a full-color method is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) at each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each RGB color in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

The method is not limited to the full-color method. For example, in a configuration in which only 256 colors can be displayed at each dot, the storage capacity required for storing color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 142 is provided with the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b, in a situation where drawing to the symbol display device 41 is executed using the drawing data created in one frame area. , Creation of drawing data to be used in the future is executed for other frame areas. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer 142.

In the display circuit 155, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 142a or the second frame area 142b, and the image signal is transmitted to the display circuit 155. It is output to the symbol display device 41 via the connected output port 138. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the output target frame areas 142a and 142b to the display circuit 155. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by adjusting the resolution with a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 41. Then, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output based on the gradation data. A synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal is also output from the display circuit 155.

<Basic processing in display CPU 131>
Next, the basic processing in the display CPU 131 will be described. The display CPU 131 executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing. The content of the command interrupt process is the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, the content of the V interrupt process is the same as the V interrupt process (FIG. 15) executed by the display CPU 72 of the first embodiment, except for the task process of step S608.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the task processing in the present embodiment.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the delay flag provided in the work RAM 132. If "1" is not set in the delay flag (step S2201: NO), the control start setting process is executed in step S2202. In the setting process for starting control, the display CPU 131 executes a process for setting an individual image for which control is newly started in this processing time. In the present embodiment, the individual image is a one 2D image defined by still image data such as image data for the back surface, or a one 3D image defined by a combination of object data and texture data. is there.

Specifically, regarding the setting process for starting control, first, based on the currently set execution target table, it is determined whether or not an individual image to be controlled starts exists in this processing time. If it exists, the work RAM 132 searches for a free buffer area for performing various operations in controlling the individual image, and has a one-to-one correspondence with the individual image grasped as the control start target. Allocate free buffer area so as to. Further, the initialization process is executed for all the reserved free buffer areas, and the parameter information for starting control according to the individual image is set for the initialized free buffer area.

In the following step S2202, the control update target is grasped. The control update target is an individual image for which the control start processing has been completed and which may be included in the image for one frame after the current processing time.

After that, in step S2204, a new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted, and in step S2205 immediately after that, a new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited, and then the background calculation process is executed (step S2206). In the background arithmetic processing, the coordinates, rotation angle, scale, light information for adding light and darkness, and projection in the world coordinate system are performed for the backmost image that constitutes the background image and the background character. It executes a process of calculating and deriving various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as camera information to be performed and Z test designation.

After that, in step S2207, a new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted, and in step S2208 immediately after that, a new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited, and then the effect calculation process is executed (step S2209). In the effect calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the above-mentioned various parameter information is executed for the individual image to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect.

After that, the new activation of the V interrupt process is permitted in step S2210, the new activation of the V interrupt process is prohibited in the immediately following step S2211, and then the symbol arithmetic processing is executed (step S2212). In the symbol calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the various parameter information of the symbol image to be displayed in a variable manner in each game is executed.

Incidentally, in each process of step S2206, step S2209 and step S2212, a process of updating the parameter information for control start set in step S2201 is executed. Further, in each of the processes of step S2206, step S2209, and step S2212, animation data set so as to change various parameter information of the individual image according to a specific pattern each time the image update timing is reached is used. This animation data is defined according to the type of individual image. Further, the animation data is stored in the memory module 133 in advance. Further, in the symbol arithmetic processing, when the execution target table for fraud notification or status notification is read into the work RAM 132, the arithmetic processing for displaying the notification image corresponding to the execution target table is executed. The notification sprite for displaying the notification image and various parameter information applied to the notification sprite are derived.

After that, in step S2213, the calculation completion flag provided in the work RAM 132 is set to "1", and in step S2214, the process of grasping the object to be arranged in the world coordinate system is executed, and then this task process is terminated. .. In the process of grasping the object to be arranged in the world coordinate system, among the individual images subject to control update by each process of step S2206, step S2209, and step S2212, the individual image set as the drawing target in the current drawing list is selected. Execute the process to grasp. The grasp is performed based on the currently set execution target table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

That is, since the number of individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 131 is set to be larger than the number of individual images to be controlled by the VDP 135, the adjustment is performed in step S2214. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled by the display CPU 131 and the individual image to be controlled by the VDP 135 may be the same. In this case, the process of step S2214 is executed. No need.

On the other hand, when "1" is set in the delay flag (step S2201: YES), after clearing the delay flag "0" in step S2215, a new processing time of V interrupt processing in the previous task processing Jumps to the process that was being executed immediately before the start of (step S2216). As a result, it is possible to resume the execution of the process from the timing when the interruption occurred in the previous task process. The contents of the delay flag and the calculation completion flag are the same as those in the first embodiment, and in the task processing, step S2201, step S2204 to step S2205, step S2207 to step S2208, step S220-10, step S2211, and step S2213. The action and effect of executing steps S2215 to S2216 are also the same as those in the first embodiment.

<Basic processing in VDP135>
Next, the basic processing executed by the VDP 135 will be described.

In the VDP 135, a process of setting the value of the register 153 based on the command transmitted from the display CPU 131, a process of creating drawing data in the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131, At least the process of outputting the image signal to the symbol display device 41 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 142a and 142b.

Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 153 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 156 for the display CPU 131. Further, the process of creating the drawing data is repeatedly executed at a predetermined period (for example, 20 msec) in cooperation with the geometry calculation unit 151 and the rendering unit 152. Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 155 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the process, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 131 to the VDP 135 will be described. 43 (a) to 43 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information on the target buffer, which is information indicating which of the first frame area 142a and the second frame area 142b is to be created for the image for one frame related to the drawing list, is set. There is. In addition, various designated information is set in the header information.

In the drawing list, in addition to the above header information, a plurality of types of image data to be arranged in the world coordinate system when creating the drawing data this time are set, and further, information on the drawing order of each image data and information on the drawing order of each image data. Parameter information of each image data is set. In detail, the drawing order information is set so as to be serial number numerical information, and the parameter information is set so that there is a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information.

In the drawing list of FIG. 43 (a), the image data for the back surface is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second object, the background object B is set as the third object, and so on. There is. Further, the image data for the effect is set in the order after the image data for the background. For example, the object A for the effect is set as the mth, the object B for the effect is set as the m + 1th, and so on. There is. Further, the image data for the symbol is set in the order after the image data for the effect, for example, the symbol object A is set as the nth, the symbol object B is set as the n + 1th, and so on. There is.

The order in which each image data is set in the drawing list is not limited to the above, and the order in which the image data is set may be the reverse of the above, and the image for the design. The image data for the effect or the image data for the background may be set after the data, and the image data for the design is set in the order between the image data for the predetermined effect and the image data for the other effect. It may have been done.

Parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3), ..., P (m), P (m + 1), ..., P (n), P (n + 1), ... , Multiple types of parameter information are set. Regarding the parameter information P (1) of the image data for the back surface, specifically, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the information of the address of the area where the image data for the back surface is stored in the memory module 133 and the back surface. Coordinate information (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) indicating a position in the world coordinate system when setting image data for the back and world coordinates when setting image data for the back Information on the rotation angle indicating the rotation angle in the system, information on the scale indicating the magnification when setting in the world coordinate system with respect to the scale set as the initial state of the image data for the back surface, and information for the back surface. A uniform α value information indicating the entire transparent information (or transparent information) when setting image data is set.

Here, the coordinate information is set individually for all the vertices of the object data. Moreover, although the information of this coordinate is set for the object data, it is not set for the texture data. In the texture data, the coordinate values of each pixel are predetermined in association with each vertex of the object data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 133 in a state of being attached to the combination of the object data and the texture data. This UV coordinate value is referred to by VDP135 when texture mapping.

In the parameter information (P1), the camera information including the coordinates and orientation information of the virtual camera when projecting the image data for the back surface on the virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing and the image data for the back surface are rendered. Light information, including information on the position and orientation of the virtual light source that determines the shadow in the case, is set.

In the parameter information (P1), information specified by the Z test indicating whether or not the Z buffer method, which is a kind of method for erasing the hidden surface, is applied is set. The Z-buffer method is a method in which each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) arranged on the Z-axis when a large number of objects or two-dimensional images overlap in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) in the world coordinate system. This is a processing method for depth adjustment in which the distances from the viewpoint are sequentially referred to, and the numerical information set in the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set in the corresponding unit area in the frame areas 142a and 142b.

In addition to the Z-buffer method, a Z-sort method is set as a method for erasing the hidden surface. The Z sort method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which the numerical information set for each pixel is sequentially set in the corresponding unit area in the frame areas 142a and 142b for each pixel arranged on the Z axis. When the Z sort method is applied, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the corresponding α value is applied to the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each pixel arranged on the Z axis. In this state, the addition processing of the numerical information and the arithmetic processing for fusion are executed. Although the description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sorting is omitted, it is activated when the effect image is displayed.

In the parameter information (P1), information on α data designation indicating whether or not α data is applied and an application target, and information on fog designation indicating whether or not fog is applied and an application target are set.

Here, the α value is the transparency information of the corresponding pixel. As a method of setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of uniformly specifying the α value and a method of specifying the α data. The uniform α value is transparent information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 131. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transparent information applied to each pixel of two-dimensional still image data and texture data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as image data. In the α data, the transparency information can be different for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the same texture data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting a uniform α value.

By setting the α value and α data uniformly as described above, the transparency of the two-dimensional still image data and texture data should be controlled uniformly for all pixels instead of being finely controlled for each pixel. In a good situation, it is possible to reduce the required data capacity by being able to deal with a uniform α value, and it is also possible to finely control the transparency in pixel units by applying α data.

The fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction, specifically, a Z-axis direction in the world coordinate system. Fog is used to represent fog or the inside of a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, the image for one frame is fogged in a certain manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, if the same fog as other objects is applied to the object located on the back side in the Z-axis direction, it will be too dark and the texture will not be obtained. In this case, another fog is set for the object. It is good to have a configuration. As a result, the effect of setting the fog can be obtained while not impairing the texture.

In other parameters such as the parameter information P (2), as shown in FIG. 43 (c), among the various information in FIG. 43 (b), the object information and the texture are replaced with the image data information for the back surface. Information and is set. As such information, information on the address of the area where the object or texture is stored is set in the memory module 133.

The drawing process in the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the following description, a state in which drawing data is created as the drawing process is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 45.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not a new drawing list is received from the display CPU 131. If a new drawing list has been received, the background setting process is executed in step S2302.

In the background setting process, among the image data specified in the drawing list this time, the image data for the back surface for displaying the background image and the object data for displaying the character are grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the image data and the object data are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

If it is not arranged, the free buffer area to be referred to for arranging it in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if the free buffer area is secured, the initialization process of that area is executed. After that, the memory module 133 grasps and reads out the address where the image data is stored, and at the same time, the coordinate values of the local coordinate system for the image data so as to be the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale specified in the drawing list. Is executed in the world conversion process for converting to the coordinate values of the world coordinate system, and is set in the buffer area secured above.

If it is placed, the update processing of various parameters set in the buffer area already secured is executed. Further, in the background setting process, the control end process for erasing the background image data that is not specified in the drawing list this time among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

In the following step S2303, the setting process for the effect is executed. In the setting process for the effect, among the image data specified in the drawing list this time, the object data for displaying the effect image is grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object data is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, the process for starting the arrangement is executed as in the case described in the setting process for the background. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for the effect, the control end process for deleting the image data for the effect that is not specified in the drawing list this time among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

In the following step S2304, the setting process for the symbol is executed. In the setting process for the symbol, among the image data specified in the drawing list this time, the object data for displaying the symbol is grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object data is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, the process for starting the arrangement is executed as in the case described in the setting process for the background. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the setting process for the symbol, the control end process for deleting the image data for the symbol that is not specified in the drawing list this time among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

By executing the processes of steps S2302 to S2304, as shown in FIG. 45, they are designated as placement targets by the drawing list in the world coordinate system defined by the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis. The setting of the scene in which the image data PC1 for the rearmost image and the various object data PCs 2 to PC10 are arranged at the coordinates, rotation angle, and scale also specified by the drawing list is completed.

Note that FIG. 45 simply shows how the image data PC1 for the rearmost image and the various object data PCs 2 to PC10 are arranged. Further, the image data PC1 for the rearmost image does not need to have the coordinates in the Z-axis direction set to the back side for all of the various object data PC2 to PC10. For example, the image data PC1 for the rearmost image Since the images are arranged in a bent state or an inclined state, the coordinates in the Z-axis direction may be closer to the front side than some object data. However, in the area of the image data PC1 for the rearmost image in which the coordinates in the X-axis direction and the coordinates in the Y-axis direction are the same as some of the object data, the coordinates in the Z-axis direction are on the back side of the object data. As a result, all the object data is not covered by the image data PC1 for the rearmost image.

In the following step S2305, the conversion process to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed. In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint are determined based on the camera information specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is set as the origin based on the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint. Convert to the camera coordinate system (camera space). As a result, as shown in FIG. 45, the viewpoint PC 11 shown in the camera shape is set, and the corresponding coordinate system is set.

Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (image data PC1 for the rearmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10), and the camera coordinate system actually exists for each individual image. .. By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, it is possible to switch the viewpoint individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 45 shows a state in which all the individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

In the following step S2306, the conversion process to the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed. In the conversion process to the field of view coordinate system, each camera coordinate system is converted into a field of view coordinate system corresponding to the field of view (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, for each individual image, if it is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image near the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

In the following step S2307, clipping processing is executed. In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S2306 is grasped with the corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. Then, in that state, extraction is performed in step S2306 with reference to the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 45) corresponding to the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn (that is, the display surface P of the symbol display device 41). Clip each individual image that has been created.

In the following step S2308, the lighting process is executed. In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and orientation of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the drawing list, and shading, reflection, and the like are calculated for each object extracted by the clipping process based on the virtual light source. ..

In the following step S2309, the color information setting process is executed. In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting the color information in pixel units (that is, polygon units) or vertex units for each object extracted by the clipping process. In the color information setting process, basically, a texture mapping process of pasting the corresponding texture data to each object data extracted by the clipping process is executed. In addition, depending on the situation, processing such as bump mapping or transparency mapping is executed.

After that, in step S2310 and step S2311, each individual image extracted in step S2307 and further completed in the lighting process and the color information setting process is projected onto the screen area PC12 which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection). And parallel projection) to create drawing data.

Specifically, first, in step S2310, the drawing data creation process for the background is executed. In the background drawing data creation process, the background image is drawn by projecting the image data and object data for the rearmost image set as the background image onto the screen area PC12 while erasing the hidden surface. Create data.

Here, the VRAM 134 is provided with a screen buffer 144 as shown in FIG. 41, and the screen buffer 144 includes a background buffer in which drawing data for the background is written, and drawing data and symbols for the effect. An effect in which drawing data for the purpose is written together and a buffer for the design are set. Further, an area having the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC12 is set in the buffer for the background and the buffer for the effect and the design. The background drawing data created in step S2310 is written in the background buffer. If the background image data is not specified in the drawing list, the background drawing data is not created.

In the following step S2311, drawing data creation processing for the effect and the design is executed. In the drawing data creation process for the effect and the pattern, the object data set as the effect image and the object data set as the pattern are projected onto the screen area PC12 while erasing the hidden surface to screen the screen. Drawing data for the effect and the design is created in the buffer for the effect and the design in the buffer 144. If the image data for the effect and the design is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for the effect and the design is not created.

Then, in step S2312, after executing the drawing data compositing process, the main drawing process is terminated. In the drawing data compositing process of step S2312, the drawing data for the background, which is individually created in the screen buffer 144 by the processes of steps S2310 and S2311, and the drawing data for the effect and the design are combined, and the drawing data is combined. The composition result is written in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn as drawing data for one frame.

In this case, the writing order is defined so as to line up from the back side to the front side in the order of drawing data for the background → drawing data for the effect and the design. Therefore, the drawing data for the background is first written in the frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn, and then the drawing data for the effect and the design is written. At this time, if a completely transparent α value is set for the pixel to be drawn, the image on the back side is used as it is, and if a semi-transparent α value is set, the α value is set. The image on the back side and the image on the front side are fused at the reference ratio, and when the opaque α value is set, the image on the front side is overwritten on the image on the back side. , The operation for blending is executed.

Incidentally, although each drawing data is defined to have an area for one frame, a completely transparent α value is set for the blank portion where the projection is not performed in the drawing data for the effect and the design.

The creation of the drawing data for one frame is performed so as to be completed within the range of the 20 msec cycle. Further, an image signal is output from the display circuit 155 to the symbol display device 41 based on the created drawing data. However, since the double buffer method is adopted as described above, the output of the image signal is output to the output. It is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data corresponding to the update timing after one frame for the relevant frame. Further, the display circuit 155 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame areas 142a and 142b to be referred to each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed, and the drawing data can be displayed by switching by the selector circuit. The frame areas 142a and 142b to be drawn are regulated so as not to be output targets for outputting an image signal.

The steps S2302 to S2307 are the processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 151, and the steps S2308 to S2312 are the processes executed by the rendering unit 152.

<Structure for loop production>
Next, a configuration for performing a loop effect will be described.

The loop effect is an effect in which a moving image in which a loop effect character performs a predetermined operation is repeatedly displayed in a predetermined period consisting of a plurality of image update timings. In the moving image for loop production, the image of the final frame and the image of the start frame are set to have continuity. Specifically, the image of the final frame and the image of the start frame are set to have continuity so that the player recognizes that the movement of the loop effect character is a continuous movement. As a result, when the same moving image for loop effect is displayed again after the moving image for loop effect makes one round, the movement of the character for loop effect can be made smooth.

The contents of the loop effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 46. 46 (a) and 46 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the content of the moving image display in the loop effect.

As shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), a plurality of loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 are simultaneously displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 during the loop effect. Specifically, the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are displayed at the same time. Although the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 are shown in a simplified manner in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are face, body, both hands, and both feet. It is displayed so that the player can recognize that the person having the is represented. Further, the A character CH8 for loop production and the B character CH9 for loop production are different characters because at least one of the pattern including the facial expression and the pattern of clothes, the outer edge shape, and the size is different. It is displayed so that the player can recognize it. In the loop effect, the moving image is displayed so that the player recognizes that the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are performing different operations.

As the loop effect, the first loop effect mode shown in FIG. 46 (a) and the second loop effect mode shown in FIG. 46 (b) are set. In the first loop effect mode and the second loop effect mode, as shown in FIGS. 46 (a) and 46 (b), the loop effect A character CH8 performed in one round of the corresponding loop effect moving image. The operation contents are different, and the operation contents of the loop effect B character CH9 performed in one lap of the corresponding loop effect moving image are different. Then, when the loop effect is executed, the video for the loop effect according to the second loop effect mode is displayed after the first animation period in which the video for the loop effect according to the first loop effect mode is repeated a plurality of times. A second animation period that is repeated multiple times is performed.

The loop effect is executed as an effect for the game times, and occurs in the game times that results in a big hit. The first animation period occurs before the combination of symbols indicating the jackpot result is displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, and the second animation period is the symbol indicating the jackpot result on the display surface P. Occurs after the combination of is displayed. Therefore, in the first animation period, the operation display expected to be a big hit result is performed in each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, and in the second animation period, the big hit result is displayed. An operation display for congratulating the fact is performed on each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9.

When the loop effect is executed as described above, when the moving image for the loop effect is repeated in each of the first loop effect mode and the second effect mode, the loop effect is formed by the image of the final frame and the image of the start frame. The operation of the A character CH8 for loop production has continuity, and the operation of the B character CH9 for loop production has continuity. On the other hand, between the image of the final frame in the moving image for the loop effect according to the first loop effect mode and the image of the start frame in the moving image for the loop effect according to the second loop effect mode, the loop effect A character CH8 The operation does not have continuity, and the operation of the loop effect B character CH9 does not have continuity.

Therefore, when the second animation period is performed after the first animation period is performed, the data for displaying the image of the final frame in the moving image for the loop effect according to the first loop effect mode and the second loop effect are performed. The second animation period is started after the interpolation display period in which the interpolated display is performed by the data derived by using the data for displaying the image of the start frame in the moving image for the loop effect according to the aspect is executed. .. Hereinafter, a specific configuration for executing the above loop effect will be described.

First, the data structure for executing the loop effect will be described. FIG. 47A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the memory module 133 for executing the loop effect. As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the memory module 133 has the first A character for the loop effect A character CH8 to display the operation corresponding to the moving image for the loop effect according to the first loop effect mode. According to the animation data AD1, the second animation data AD2 for the A character for causing the A character CH8 for the loop effect to display the operation corresponding to the moving image for the loop effect according to the second loop effect mode, and the first loop effect mode. The first animation data AD3 for the B character for causing the B character CH9 for the loop effect to display the operation corresponding to the moving image for the loop effect, and the operation display corresponding to the moving image for the loop effect according to the second loop effect mode. The second animation data AD4 for the B character to be performed by the B character CH9 for loop production is stored in advance.

The animation data AD1 to AD4 are data for determining the coordinates of each vertex in the object data for displaying the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. A plurality of pointer information is set in the animation data AD1 to AD4 so as to be serial numbers, and the coordinate data of each vertex in the corresponding object data is set in each of the pointer information. The pointer information is updated when it advances by one frame in the situation where the loop effect is being performed (every time the image update timing is reached), and the coordinate data to be referred to is in the following order as the pointer information is updated. It will be changed. In this case, the continuous coordinate data is set so that the corresponding loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 perform the operation display corresponding to the corresponding loop effect moving image.

As described above, the first animation data AD1 and AD3 are provided to display the moving image for the loop effect according to the first loop effect mode, and the second animation data AD1 and AD3 are provided to display the moving image for the loop effect according to the second loop effect mode. Animation data AD2 and AD4 are provided. In this way, the animation data AD1 to AD4 are separately provided corresponding to the video for loop production according to each loop production mode, so that the video for loop production can be repeatedly displayed in each period, and at once. It is possible to suppress the amount of data of the animation data AD1 to AD4 to be read. By suppressing the amount of animation data AD1 to AD4 to be read at one time, it is possible to disperse the period required for reading the animation data AD1 to AD4.

Further, even if the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are displayed at the same time and the loop effect moving image is displayed in the same period, the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B are displayed. Animation data AD1 to AD4 are provided corresponding to each of the characters CH9. As a result, the animation data AD1 and AD3 for operating the loop effect A character CH8 and the animation data AD2 and AD4 for operating the loop effect B character CH9 can be handled individually.

As shown in FIG. 47A, the memory module 133 is provided with a blending table CT in addition to the animation data AD1 to AD4 as data for executing the loop effect. The blending table CT is data that determines the blending ratio of the coordinate data by the first animation data AD1 and AD3 and the coordinate data by the second animation data AD2 and AD4 at each update timing of the interpolation display period.

The compounding table CT will be described in detail with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 47 (b). In the compounding table CT, pointer information set in a one-to-one correspondence with all update timings included in the interpolation display period, and coordinate data by the first animation data AD1 and AD3 at the update timing corresponding to each pointer information. And the data of the blending ratio with the coordinate data by the second animation data AD2 and AD4 are set. Specifically, from the start timing to the end timing of the interpolation display period, the mixing ratio of the coordinate data by the first animation data AD1 and AD3 gradually decreases, and the mixing ratio of the coordinate data by the second animation data AD2 and AD4 gradually decreases. The compounding table CT is set so that is gradually increased. In this case, the combination of the coordinate table by the combination table CT is performed for the coordinate data of the final timing by the first animation data AD1 and AD3 and the coordinate data of the start timing by the second animation data AD2 and AD4. Therefore, in the interpolation display period, the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 are displayed as moving images so as to gradually change from the display mode at the final timing of the first animation period to the display mode at the start timing of the second animation period.

Next, a state in which the loop effect is executed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. FIG. 48A shows the first animation period, and FIG. 48B shows the timing at which the moving image for the loop effect according to the first loop effect mode based on the first animation data AD1 and AD3 is newly started. 48 (c) shows the interpolation display period, FIG. 48 (d) shows the second animation period, and FIG. 48 (e) shows the moving image for loop production by the second loop production mode based on the second animation data AD2 and AD4. Indicates the timing when is newly started.

The first animation period is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 48 (a), and the first loop effect is produced at each of the timing of t1, the timing of t2, and the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 48 (b). The display lap of the moving image for loop production according to the mode is newly started. After that, as shown in FIG. 48A, the first animation period ends at the timing of t4, which is the timing at which the display lap of the moving image for the loop effect according to the first loop effect mode started at the timing of t3 ends. , The interpolation display period is started as shown in FIG. 48 (c). The interpolation display period continues until the timing of t5.

When the interpolation display period ends at the timing of t5, the second animation period starts as shown in FIG. 48 (d). Then, at each of the timing of t5, the timing of t6, and the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 48 (e), the display lap of the moving image for the loop effect according to the second loop effect mode is newly started. After that, as shown in FIG. 48 (d), the second animation period ends at the timing of t8, which is the timing at which the display lap of the moving image for the loop effect according to the second loop effect mode started at the timing of t7 ends. To.

By the way, the duration T2 of the interpolation display period is the period T1 required for the moving image for the loop effect by the first loop effect mode to make one round in the first animation period, and the loop effect by the second loop effect mode in the second animation period. It is set shorter than the period T3 required for the moving image to make one lap.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the loop effect will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process for loop effect executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for loop effect is executed in the effect operation process of step S2209 in the task process (FIG. 42). The arithmetic processing for the loop effect is started when the information about the loop effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

If it is the first animation period (step S2401: YES), it is determined in step S2402 whether or not it is the start timing of the first animation period. When it is the start timing of the first animation period (step S2402: YES), the first animation data AD1 for the A character and the first animation data AD3 for the B character are read from the memory module 133 into the work RAM 132 (step S2403). In the following step S2404, each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for displaying the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 is grasped. The image data includes object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and loop effect B character CH9. Contains the corresponding texture data. After that, in step S2405, the loop effect start designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the loop effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When a negative determination is made in step S2402 or when the process of step S2405 is executed, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S2406). The image data includes object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and loop effect B character CH9. Contains the corresponding texture data.

After that, in step S2407, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. Specifically, since this is the first animation period, the coordinate data of all the vertices set in the first animation data AD1 for the A character corresponding to the pointer information at the update timing of this time is read out, and at the same time. In the first animation data AD3 for the B character, the coordinate data of all the vertices set corresponding to the pointer information at the current update timing is read out. Then, these read coordinate data are written in the area secured corresponding to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 and the area reserved corresponding to the object data of the loop effect B character CH9 in the work RAM 132. By updating the information for control. As a result, the loop effect A character CH8 can be operated according to the first animation data AD1 for the A character, and the loop effect B character CH9 can be operated according to the first animation data AD3 for the B character. It will be possible.

In the following step S2408, the various image data grasped in step S2406 are derived by calculating parameter information other than the coordinate data, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The control information is updated by writing in the reserved area and the reserved area corresponding to the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. After that, in step S2409, the loop effect designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the loop effect is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

If it is the interpolation display period (step S2401: NO, step S2410: YES), the interpolation display period processing is executed in step S2411. In the interpolation display period processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 50, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not it is the interpolation display start timing on the front side.

In the interpolation display period, as described above, the coordinate data of each vertex in the loop effect A character CH8 is a mixture of the first animation data AD1 for the A character and the second animation data AD2 for the A character in a predetermined ratio. The coordinate data of each vertex in the loop effect B character CH9 is derived by combining the first animation data AD3 for the B character and the second animation data AD4 for the B character in a predetermined ratio. Derived. In this case, the derivation of the coordinate data by the combination is not started at the same time for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, but the derivation of the coordinate data by the combination for the loop effect A character CH8. Is started first, and at the next image update timing, the derivation of the coordinate data by blending the loop effect B character CH9 is started.

Such contents will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. FIG. 51 (a) shows the image update timing, FIG. 51 (b) shows the first animation period of the loop effect A character CH8, and FIG. 51 (c) shows the interpolation display period of the loop effect A character CH8. FIG. 51 (d) shows the first animation period of the loop effect B character CH9, and FIG. 51 (e) shows the interpolation display period of the loop effect B character CH9.

The timing of t1, the timing of t2, the timing of t3, and the timing of t4 are image update timings as shown in FIG. 51 (a). In this case, for the loop effect A character CH8, at the timing of t2, the first animation period ends as shown in FIG. 51 (b) and the interpolation display period starts as shown in FIG. 51 (c). To. However, at the timing of t2, the first animation period is continued for the loop effect B character CH9. After that, at the timing of t3, which is the update timing one frame later, for the loop effect B character CH9, as shown in FIG. 51 (d), the first animation period ends and as shown in FIG. 51 (e). The interpolation display period starts at.

Returning to the description of the interpolation display period processing (FIG. 50), the start timing of the interpolation display period is the start timing of deriving the coordinate data by blending the A character CH8 for loop effect. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S2501 and the process proceeds to step S2502. In step S2502, the second animation data AD2 for the A character is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. Further, in step S2503, the compounding table CT is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132.

In the following step S2504, based on the currently set execution target table, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped. The image data includes object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and loop effect B character CH9. Contains the corresponding texture data.

After that, in step S2505, the coordinate data of each vertex of the loop effect A character CH8 is updated. In the update process, the coordinate data of each vertex of the final timing in the first animation data AD1 for the A character and the coordinate data of each vertex of the start timing in the second animation data AD2 for the A character are stored in the compounding table CT. Mix in the proportion corresponding to the first pointer information. Specifically, the coordinate data of the final timing in the first animation data AD1 and the coordinate data of the start timing in the second animation data AD2 are mixed in the corresponding vertices at a ratio of 95: 5. Then, the coordinate data obtained by the combination is written in the area secured corresponding to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132 to update the control information.

After that, in step S2506, the coordinate data of each vertex of the loop effect B character CH9 is updated. Specifically, the coordinate data of each vertex at the final timing is read out in the first animation data AD3 for the B character. Then, the read coordinate data is written in the area reserved corresponding to the object data of the loop effect B character CH9 in the work RAM 132 to update the control information. Here, even at the immediately preceding update timing, that is, at the final timing of the first animation period, the coordinate data of each vertex of the final timing in the first animation data AD3 for the B character is used as the coordinate data of each vertex of the B character CH9 for loop production. Is used. Therefore, at the start timing of the interpolation display period, the coordinate data of each vertex in the loop effect B character CH9 is not changed from the immediately preceding update timing.

In the following step S2507, the parameter information other than the coordinate data is calculated and derived from the various image data grasped in step S2504, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The control information is updated by writing in the reserved area and the reserved area corresponding to the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. After that, in step S2508, the loop effect designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the loop effect is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When it is the update timing of the next image with respect to the start timing of the interpolation display period (step S2501: NO, step S2509: YES), the second animation data AD4 for the B character is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step). S2510). Further, in step S2511, the compounding table CT is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132. Here, at the start timing of the interpolation display period, as described above, the blending table CT for applying to the animation data AD1 and AD2 for the A character has already been read into the work RAM 132 in step S2503. On the other hand, by newly reading the blending table CT in step S2511, the blending table CT for applying to the animation data AD1 and AD2 for the A character and the animation data AD3 and AD4 for the B character are applied. The compounding table CT and the compounding table CT of the above are individually read out to the work RAM 132. As a result, even if the combination of the coordinate data using the combination table CT is started with the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 shifted by one update timing, the combination table It is possible to start blending the coordinate data from the ratio corresponding to the first pointer information by CT.

In the following step S2512, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. The image data includes object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and loop effect B character CH9. Contains the corresponding texture data.

After that, in step S2513, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. In the update process, the coordinate data of each vertex of the final timing in the first animation data AD1 for the A character and the coordinate data of each vertex of the start timing in the second animation data AD2 for the A character are combined with the loop effect A. In the blending table CT corresponding to the character CH8, blending is performed at a ratio corresponding to the pointer information of this time. Then, the coordinate data obtained by the combination is written in the area secured corresponding to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132 to update the control information. Further, the coordinate data of each vertex of the final timing in the first animation data AD3 for the B character and the coordinate data of each vertex of the start timing in the second animation data AD4 for the B character are transferred to the loop effect B character CH9. In the corresponding blending table CT, blend in the ratio corresponding to the pointer information of this time. Then, the coordinate data obtained by the combination is written in the area secured corresponding to the object data of the loop effect B character CH9 in the work RAM 132 to update the control information.

In the following step S2507, the parameter information other than the coordinate data is calculated and derived from the various image data grasped in step S2512, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The control information is updated by writing in the reserved area and the reserved area corresponding to the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. After that, in step S2508, the loop effect designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the loop effect is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When the interpolation display period is the update timing after the interpolation display start timing on the rear side (step S2501: NO, step S2509: NO), the process proceeds to step S2512 without executing the processes of steps S2510 and S2511. .. In step S2512, based on the currently set execution target table, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped. The image data includes object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and loop effect B character CH9. Contains the corresponding texture data.

After that, in step S2513, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. In the update process, the coordinate data of each vertex of the final timing in the first animation data AD1 for the A character and the coordinate data of each vertex of the start timing in the second animation data AD2 for the A character are combined with the loop effect A. In the blending table CT corresponding to the character CH8, blending is performed at a ratio corresponding to the pointer information of this time. Then, the coordinate data obtained by the combination is written in the area secured corresponding to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132 to update the control information. Further, the coordinate data of each vertex of the final timing in the first animation data AD3 for the B character and the coordinate data of each vertex of the start timing in the second animation data AD4 for the B character are transferred to the loop effect B character CH9. In the corresponding blending table CT, blend in the ratio corresponding to the pointer information of this time. Then, the coordinate data obtained by the combination is written in the area secured corresponding to the object data of the loop effect B character CH9 in the work RAM 132 to update the control information.

In the following step S2507, the parameter information other than the coordinate data is calculated and derived from the various image data grasped in step S2512, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The control information is updated by writing in the reserved area and the reserved area corresponding to the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. After that, in step S2508, the loop effect designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the loop effect is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

Returning to the explanation of the arithmetic processing for loop production (FIG. 49), in the case of the second animation period (step S2401 and step S2410: NO), the update timing is supported based on the currently set execution target table. Grasp the type of image data (step S2406). The image data includes object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and loop effect B character CH9. Contains the corresponding texture data.

After that, in step S2407, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. Specifically, since this is the second animation period, the coordinate data of all the vertices set in the second animation data AD2 for the A character corresponding to the pointer information at the update timing of this time is read out, and at the same time. In the second animation data AD4 for the B character, the coordinate data of all the vertices set corresponding to the pointer information at the current update timing is read out. Then, these read coordinate data are written in the area secured corresponding to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 and the area reserved corresponding to the object data of the loop effect B character CH9 in the work RAM 132. By updating the information for control. As a result, the loop effect A character CH8 can be operated according to the second animation data AD2 for the A character, and the loop effect B character CH9 can be operated according to the second animation data AD4 for the B character. It will be possible.

In the following step S2408, the various image data grasped in step S2406 are derived by calculating parameter information other than the coordinate data, and the derived parameter information is made to correspond to the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 in the work RAM 132. The control information is updated by writing in the reserved area and the reserved area corresponding to the object data of the loop effect B character CH9. After that, in step S2409, the loop effect designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the loop effect is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When the arithmetic processing for loop effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to VDP135 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609) includes the object data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop. Information on usage instructions of texture data corresponding to the A character CH8 for effect, object data corresponding to B character CH9 for loop effect, and texture data corresponding to B character CH9 for loop effect is set. Further, in the drawing list, parameter information to be applied to the image data including the coordinate data of each vertex is set. In addition, loop effect designation information is set in the drawing list, and loop effect start designation information is set at the start timing of the loop effect.

Next, the setting process for loop effect executed by VDP135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the loop effect is executed as a part of the setting process for the effect executed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the loop effect designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the loop effect is executed.

When the loop effect start designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S2601: YES), the object corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8 in the memory module 133 is obtained from the address information set in the drawing list. Grasp the address where the data, the texture data corresponding to the loop effect A character CH8, the object data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9, and the texture data corresponding to the loop effect B character CH9 are stored, and grasp the address. Based on the result, these image data are read from the memory module 133 into the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S2602).

When a negative determination is made in step S2601 or when the process of step S2602 is executed, in step S2603, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped. Further, in step S2604, the coordinate data of each vertex in the world coordinate system for each of the object data for displaying the loop effect A character CH8 and the object data for displaying the loop effect B character CH9 is obtained this time. It is grasped from the drawing list, and in step S2605, the other parameter information of these object data and the corresponding texture data is grasped. Then, in step S2606, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed according to the contents corresponding to the grasped results of steps S2603 to S2605.

By executing the setting process for the loop effect as described above, the object data of the loop effect A character CH8 and the object data of the loop effect B character CH9 are arranged in the world coordinate system, and the object data in the loop effect The coordinate data derived from each animation data AD1 to AD4 is applied as the coordinate data of each vertex. As a result, on the display surface P, the moving image is displayed so that the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 operate in the manner corresponding to each of the first animation period, the interpolation display period, and the second animation period. Will be

The first animation data AD1 and AD3 are provided to display the moving image for the loop effect according to the first loop effect mode, and the second animation data AD2 is provided to display the moving image for the loop effect according to the second loop effect mode. , AD4 is provided. In this way, the animation data AD1 to AD4 are separately provided corresponding to the video for loop production according to each loop production mode, so that the video for loop production can be repeatedly displayed in each period, and at once. It is possible to suppress the amount of data of the animation data AD1 to AD4 to be read. By suppressing the amount of animation data AD1 to AD4 to be read at one time, it is possible to disperse the period required for reading the animation data AD1 to AD4.

Further, even if the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9 are displayed at the same time and the loop effect moving image is displayed in the same period, the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B are displayed. Animation data AD1 to AD4 are provided corresponding to each of the characters CH9. As a result, the animation data AD1 and AD3 for operating the loop effect A character CH8 and the animation data AD2 and AD4 for operating the loop effect B character CH9 can be handled individually.

The first animation data is between the first animation period in which the video for loop production by the first loop production mode is displayed and the second animation period in which the video for loop production in the second loop production mode is displayed. An interpolation display period is set in which the moving image is displayed using the coordinate data derived by blending the coordinate data obtained by AD1 and AD3 and the coordinate data obtained by the second animation data AD2 and AD4 at a predetermined ratio. As a result, even if the continuity of the operation display of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 is not ensured between the first animation data AD1 and AD2 and the second animation data AD2 and AD4, the first animation period to the second animation At the time of transition to the period, it is possible to ensure the continuity of the operation display of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9.

The timing when the first animation period ends and the interpolation display period starts for the loop effect A character CH8 and the timing when the first animation period ends and the interpolation display period starts for the loop effect B character CH9 It is set to have different update timings. This makes it possible to prevent the processing load at the start timing of the interpolation display period from becoming extremely large.

Interpolation for the loop effect A character CH8 The first animation period ends and the interpolation display period starts for the loop effect B character CH9 at the next image update timing. The display period starts. As a result, even if the start timing of the interpolation display period is different between the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, when the second animation period is started in the loop effect A character CH8. Can start the second animation period in the loop effect B character CH9 at an early stage.

The same compounding table CT is used in both the interpolation display period for the loop effect A character CH8 and the interpolation display period for the loop effect B character CH9. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data required to execute the interpolation display period.

<Another form of configuration related to loop production>
-When the loop effect is executed, it is not limited to the configuration in which both the first animation period and the second animation period always occur. For example, in the game times that result in a deviation, the reach display in the production for the game times Although the first animation period occurs as the production of, the second animation period does not occur, and in the game times that result in a big hit, the second animation period after the first animation period as the production of the reach display in the production for the game times. May be configured to generate. In this case, there may be a case where only the first animation period occurs as a loop effect and a case where the second animation period occurs after the first animation period. Therefore, the animation data is referred to as the first animation data AD1 and AD3. It is preferable to distinguish between the second animation data AD2 and AD4. Then, in the configuration in which the animation data AD1 to AD4 are separately provided for the first animation period and the second animation period in this way, the operation of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 is smooth as in the above embodiment. It is preferable to set the interpolation display period as much as possible.

-For the loop effect A character CH8, the first animation period ends for the loop effect B character CH9 at the timing when the first animation period ends and the interpolation display period starts, and at the next image update timing. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the interpolation display period is started, and the first animation period for the loop effect B character CH9 ends and the interpolation display period starts after a plurality of update timings with respect to the former timing. It may be configured to be interpolated.

-The start timing of the process of deriving the coordinate data by blending the coordinate data by the first animation data AD1 and AD3 and the coordinate data by the second animation data AD2 and AD4 in a predetermined ratio is the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop. In a configuration different from that of the effect B character CH9, the interpolation display period in which the coordinate data derived by blending is used is started at the same time in the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. It may be configured. As a result, it is possible to simultaneously start the operation of the interpolation display period in the appearance of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect character CH9 while distributing the processing load.

<Another form of processing for the interpolation display period>
In the above embodiment, the end timing of the first animation period is predetermined, and the loop effect is executed on the coordinate data of each vertex of each loop effect character CH8 and CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period. The configuration is constant every time, but instead of this, the end timing of the first animation period can be changed, so that the coordinates of the respective vertices of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period can be changed. The coordinate data may be configured to be variable each time the loop effect is executed. A specific configuration in which the coordinate data of each vertex can fluctuate in this way will be described in detail below.

In the present embodiment, the effect operation device operated by the player is electrically connected to the voice emission control device 60, and it is sound that the effect operation device is operated during the execution of the first animation period. When specified by the side MPU 62, a command corresponding to the command is transmitted to the display CPU 131, and when the display CPU 131 receives the command, the display CPU 131 ends the first animation period and executes the interpolation display period and then the second animation period. To start. For example, in the game times that result in a deviation, the first animation period occurs as the effect of the reach display in the effect for the game times, but the second animation period does not occur, and in the game times that result in a big hit, the game When applied to a configuration in which a second animation period occurs after the first animation period as a reach display effect in the replay effect, the timing at which the effect operation device is operated in the first animation period in the game times that results in a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to change the start timing of the second animation period, which is a definite notification that the jackpot result will be obtained. In this case, it is possible to perform definitive notification at a timing corresponding to the operation timing of the effect operation device while using the loop effect.

In the configuration in which the end timing of the first animation period can be changed as described above, the operation mode of the loop effect A character CH8 and the operation mode of the loop effect B character CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period also change. obtain. Then, when the start timing of the interpolation display period is different between the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, the operation mode of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period. It is preferable to change the target for which the interpolation display period is started first according to the above.

Specifically, of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9, the change operation of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 between the end timing of the first animation period and the start timing of the second animation period. The side with a large amount of motion has a larger amount of motion at one update timing in the interpolation display period than the side with a small amount of change motion. Then, it is preferable that the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 on the side with a large amount of change operation have more image update timings in the interpolation display period. On the other hand, even if the start timing of the interpolation display period is different for each loop effect character CH8 and CH9, the end timing of the interpolation display period is the same for each loop effect character CH8 and CH9. Therefore, the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 on the side where the end timing of the interpolation display period is late has fewer image update timings that occur in the interpolation display period than on the early side. Therefore, in this different form, of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9, the interpolation display period is started first from the side having the larger amount of change operation in relation to the end timing of the first animation period. ..

As data for determining the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 for which the interpolation display period is to be started first in relation to the end timing of the first animation period, in this alternative form, the memory module 133 is used for determining the first start target. The table PDT is stored in advance. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first start target determination table PDT.

In the table PDT for determining the first start target, the range of the number of frames (the number of image update timings) that can occur as the first animation period and the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that are the targets for starting the interpolation display period first. Correspondence relationship with is predetermined. In the design stage of the pachinko machine 10, the correspondence is the operation mode of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at each update timing of the first animation period and the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 at the start timing of the second animation period. It is determined by comparing with the operation mode of. Specifically, the number of frames in the first animation period is the first start side for the 0th frame (start timing frame) to 49th frame, 100th frame to 149th frame, and 200th frame to 249th frame. The loop effect B character CH9 is set as the character. On the other hand, for the 50th to 99th frames, the 150th to 199th frames, and the 250th to 299th frames (final timing frames) in the first animation period, a loop is performed as the character on the first start side. The A character CH8 for production is set.

A processing configuration for determining the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 for which the interpolation display period is to be started first by using the first start target determination table PDT will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart for explaining another form of the interpolation display period processing executed by the display CPU 72. The processing for the interpolation display period is performed after the operation device for production is operated in the middle of the first animation period or after the final timing of the first animation period is reached, until the end timing of the interpolation display period is reached. It is executed every time the arithmetic processing for loop effect (FIG. 49) is started.

When it is the start timing of the interpolation display period (step S2701: YES), the table PDT for determining the first start target is read from the memory module 133, and the current number of frames in the first animation period is the character on the first start side for loop production A. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the number of frames used as the character CH8 (step S2702). When it corresponds to the number of frames in which the character on the first start side is the A character CH8 for loop production (step S2702: YES), the second animation data AD2 for the A character is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S2703). ). On the other hand, when it corresponds to the number of frames in which the character on the first start side is the B character CH9 for loop production (step S2702: NO), the second animation data AD4 for the B character is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S2702: NO). Step S2704). When the process of step S2703 is executed or the process of step S2704 is executed, the compounding table CT is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 in step S2705.

In the following step S2706, based on the currently set execution target table, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped. After that, in step S2707, the coordinate data update processing according to the blending table CT is executed for the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that are on the side of starting the interpolation display period first. Further, in step S2708, the same coordinate data as the coordinate data at the immediately preceding update timing is grasped for the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that did not start the interpolation display period first. After that, in step S2709, the update processing of other parameters is executed, and in step S2710, the loop effect designation information is stored. The processing contents of steps S2706 to S2710 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2504 to S2508 of the interpolation display period processing (FIG. 50) in the above embodiment.

When the update timing of the next image is set with respect to the start timing of the interpolation display period (step S2701: NO, step S2711: YES), the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 that did not start the interpolation display period first. The second animation data AD2 and AD4 corresponding to the above are read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S2712). Specifically, when the processing of step S2703 is executed in the processing round of the processing for the immediately preceding interpolation display period, the second animation data AD4 for the B character is read out, and the processing for the processing for the immediately preceding interpolation display period is performed. When the process of step S2704 is executed at this time, the second animation data AD2 for the A character is read out. Then, in step S2713, the compounding table CT is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132.

In the following step S2714, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. After that, in step S2715, the coordinate data of each vertex is updated for each of the loop effect A character CH8 and the loop effect B character CH9. After that, in step S2709, the update processing of other parameters is executed, and in step S2710, the loop effect designation information is stored. The processing contents of steps S2709 to S2710 and steps S2714 to S2715 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2507 to S2508 and steps S2512 to S2513 of the interpolation display period processing (FIG. 50) in the above embodiment. .. Further, the processing content when the negative determination is made in step S2711 is the same as the processing content when the negative determination is made in step S2509 of the interpolation display period processing (FIG. 50) in the above embodiment.

According to this alternative embodiment, the types of loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 for which the interpolation display period is to be started first depend on the operation mode of each loop effect character CH8 and CH9 at the end timing of the first animation period. Since it is changed, not only can the processing load at the start timing of the interpolation display period be reduced, but also the interpolation display can be performed in an manner corresponding to the end timing of the first animation period. Therefore, even if the end timing of the first animation period can be changed, the processing load at the start timing of the interpolation display period is reduced while allowing the interpolation display of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 to be smoothly performed. It becomes possible.

Further, since the type corresponding to the end timing of the first animation period of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 for which the interpolation display period is to be started first is set in advance as the first start target determination table PDT, the interpolation display is performed. It is possible to reduce the processing load when determining the types of the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 for which the period is to be started first.

<Further alternative form of processing for interpolation display period>
The types of loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 for which the interpolation display period is to be started first are not limited to the configuration preset as the first start target determination table PDT, for example, in the first animation period. From the coordinate data of each vertex of each loop effect character CH8, CH9 at the end timing and the coordinate data of each vertex of each loop effect character CH8, CH9 at the start timing of the second animation period, the end of the first animation period The operation amount of each loop effect character CH8, CH9 from the timing to the start timing of the second animation period is derived by calculation, and the loop effect character CH8, CH9 on the side with the larger amount of derived operation amount is first interpolated and displayed. May be configured to start.

-Instead of the configuration in which the interpolation display period is started first from the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 on the side where the amount of movement from the end timing of the first animation period to the start timing of the second animation period is large, the amount of movement is small. The interpolation display period may be started first from the loop effect characters CH8 and CH9 on the side.

<Structure for performing bone model display production>
Next, the configuration for performing the bone model display effect will be described. 55 (a) and 55 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the bone model display.

The bone model display means that when the bone display character CH10 representing a person or the like is displayed in 3D as shown in FIG. 55 (a), a plurality of bones are displayed as object data as shown in FIG. 55 (b). It is a display content using the skeleton data FRD1 having the data BOD and a plurality of joint data JODs, and the skin data SKD1 which is set in association with the skeleton data FRD1 and represents a skin portion. The bone data BOD corresponds to the bone portion of the bone display character CH10, and the joint data JOD corresponds to the joint portion connecting a plurality of bone data BODs. Therefore, by changing the coordinate data and orientation data of the bone data BOD with reference to the joint data JOD, the coordinate data of each vertex data TD in the skin data SKD1 set in association with the skeletal data FRD1 is changed. The form of the bone display character CH10 will be changed accordingly. In addition, in FIG. 55 (b), a part of skin data is omitted.

A parent-child relationship is set for a plurality of bone data BODs, and when the parent target bone data BOD moves, the relationship between the parent target bone data BOD and the child target is changed accordingly. A certain bone data BOD will move. In the bone display character CH10, the bone data corresponding to the spine portion is set in the bone data BOD of the main parent target as the highest parent target, and the bone data BOD of the main parent target is set via the joint data JOD. The bone data BODs concatenated with each other correspond to the bone data BODs of the child objects. Further, also in the bone data BOD of the child target, the bone data BOD on the side closer to the connection with respect to the bone data BOD of the main parent target is on the far side between the bone data BODs arranged in a line from the bone data BOD of the main parent target. It is a parental relationship with the bone data BOD. Therefore, when the bone data BOD of the main parent target moves, other bone data BODs also move according to the predetermined bone weighting data BWD1. Further, even if the bone data BOD of the main parent target does not move, when the bone data BOD having a parent target relationship among a plurality of bone data BODs lined up in a row moves from the bone data BOD of the main parent target. On the other hand, the bone data BOD having a child target relationship also moves according to the predetermined bone weighting data BWD1.

The skin data SKD1 has a large number of vertex data TDs, one polygon is defined by three or four vertex data TDs, and the skin data SKD1 is represented by a large number of polygons. Each vertex data TD is associated with one or more bone data BODs according to skin weighting data SWD1. As a result, when the bone data BOD moves, the coordinate data of each vertex data TD is changed according to the skin weighting data SWD1, the skin data SKD1 is deformed accordingly, and finally the mode according to the operation of the bone data BOD. The bone display character CH10 operates and the skin portion of the bone display character CH10 is deformed.

In the bone model display effect, a plurality of bone display characters including the bone display character CH10 are displayed. The data structure for executing the bone model display effect will be described. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data structure for displaying a bone model.

As shown in FIG. 56, the memory module 133 includes the skeleton data FRD1 of the bone display character CH10 as an area for storing image data for displaying the bone model, and each of the plurality of bone display characters. Skin data storage in which skin data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters including the skeletal data storage area 161 in which the skeletal data corresponding to the above is stored in advance and the skin data SKD1 of the bone display character CH10 are stored in advance. An area 162 and a texture data storage area 163 in which texture data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters including the texture data BTD1 of the bone display character CH10 are stored in advance are provided. The skeletal data and skin data are as described above. The texture data BTD1 is data that determines the color information of the bone display character CH10, and the color information is defined in relation to the vertex data of the skin data SKD1. Therefore, by applying the texture data BTD1 after applying the skin data SKD1 to the skeleton data FRD1, the bone display character CH10 can be displayed. These skeletal data FRD1, skin data SKD1 and texture data BTD1 are used by VDP135.

In addition to the image data, control data is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as data for displaying the bone model. As an area for storing the control data, the bone weighting data storage area 164 in which bone weighting data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters including the bone weighting data BWD1 of the bone display character CH10 is stored in advance. The skin weighting data storage area 165 in which the skin weighting data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters including the skin weighting data SWD1 of the bone display character CH10 is stored in advance, and the bone animation of the bone display character CH10. A bone animation data storage area 166 in which bone animation data corresponding to each of a plurality of bone display characters including the data BAD1 is stored in advance is provided.

The bone weighting data BWD1 determines the relationship between the parent target and the child target in the plurality of bone data BODs included in the skeleton data FRD1, and converts the movement amount when the bone data BOD of the parent target moves into the bone data BOD of the child target. Determine the ratio when reflecting it. The skin weighting data SWD1 defines the correspondence between the bone data BOD and each vertex data of the skin data SKD1 and determines the ratio when the movement amount when the bone data BOD moves is reflected in each vertex data.

The bone animation data BAD1 is data that determines the coordinates of the bone data BOD at each update timing in order for the bone display character CH10 to perform a predetermined operation over a plurality of update timings. A plurality of pointer information is set in the bone animation data BAD1 so as to be serial numbers, and for each of the pointer information, each of the bone data BODs to be moved is set this time from the previous coordinate data. Difference data is set. In this case, as for the bone data BOD for which the difference data is set, the difference data is set only for a part of the bone data BOD necessary for determining the rough movement of the bone display character CH10, and the remaining bone data BOD is set. For the bone data BOD, the coordinate data is determined according to the bone weighting data BWD1. Further, even if the bone data BOD for which the difference data is set is a child target relationship with another bone data BOD, not only the difference data defined by the bone animation data BAD1 but also the difference data is not limited. The coordinate data is determined according to the coordinate data of the bone data BOD of the parent target and the bone weighting data BWD1.

Here, when displaying each bone display character CH10, the coordinate data of each bone data BOD of the corresponding skeleton data FRD1 is determined by calculation. A plurality of bone data BOD1 to BOD50 are set in the skeleton data FRD1 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 57 (a). Specifically, 50 bone data of the 1st to 50th bone data BOD1 to BOD50 are set. It should be noted that each of the bone display character CH10 displayed in the bone model display effect includes a plurality of bone data BOD1 to BOD50 within a range of up to 50 pieces. As an area for calculating the coordinate data of each of the bone data BOD1 to BOD50, the work RAM 132 is provided with a coordinate calculation area 169 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 57 (b). The coordinate calculation area 169 is provided with 50 unit calculation areas corresponding to the maximum number of bone data BOD1 to BOD50 of the bone display character CH10, and each unit calculation area has a one-to-one correspondence. Addresses (1st to 50th addresses) are set.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the bone model display effect will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the arithmetic processing for the bone model display effect executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for the bone model display effect is executed in the effect operation process of step S2209 in the task process (FIG. 42). The arithmetic processing for the bone model display effect is started when the information about the bone model display effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

When it is the start timing of the bone model display effect (step S2801: YES), the control data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters to be displayed in the current bone model display effect is worked from the memory module 133. Read to RAM 132. Specifically, the bone weighting data, the skin weighting data, and the bone animation data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters to be displayed are read out (step S2802). In the following step S2803, each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for displaying each of the plurality of bone display characters is grasped. The image data includes skeleton data, skin data, and texture data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters. After that, in step S2804, the start designation information of the bone model display effect for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the bone model display effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When a negative determination is made in step S2801 or the process of step S2804 is executed, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S2805). The image data includes skeleton data, skin data, and texture data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters.

After that, in step S2806, a value corresponding to the number of bone display characters to be displayed this time is set in the bone model number counter provided in the work RAM 132. In the following step S2807, the setting process to the unit bone number counter provided in the work RAM 132 is executed. In the setting process to the unit bone number counter, the number of bone data included in the skeleton data of the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter is set to the unit bone number counter.

After that, in step S2808, each unit calculation area included in the coordinate calculation area 169 of the work RAM 132 is cleared to "0". In the following step S2809, the coordinate data set at the previous update timing of each bone data in the bone display character that is the target of the coordinate calculation this time is read from the area secured corresponding to the bone display character. , Set in each corresponding unit calculation area of the coordinate calculation area 169.

After that, the coordinate calculation process is executed in step S2810. The coordinate calculation process is executed for all the bone data corresponding to the bone display character that is the target of the coordinate calculation this time, but the execution order is the bone data of the main parent target first, and then the parent. It is performed in order from the bone data having the highest priority as the target. As a result, the coordinate data of the bone data of the main parent target is calculated first, then the coordinate data is calculated in order from the bone data of the parent target closer to the bone data of the main parent target, and finally the child target at the end. The coordinate data of the bone data of is calculated.

The coordinate calculation process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 59. If the bone data corresponding to the current value of the unit bone number counter is not the bone data of the main parent target (step S2901: NO), in step S2902, the bone data having a parent target relationship with the current bone data. The coordinate data newly calculated for this update timing and the coordinate data set at the previous update timing (that is, written in the unit calculation area corresponding to the bone data of the current calculation target in the coordinate calculation area 169). The difference data with the current coordinate data) is calculated, and from the calculated difference data and the bone weighting data corresponding to the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter, the bone to be calculated at present. Calculate the difference data of the coordinate data to be applied to the data. Then, the difference data is written in the coordinate data at the previous update timing in the bone data of the current calculation target (that is, the coordinate data written in the unit calculation area corresponding to the bone data of the current calculation target in the coordinate calculation area 169). ) To calculate new coordinate data. The calculated coordinate data is written in the unit calculation area corresponding to the bone data of the current calculation target in the coordinate calculation area 169.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S2901 or when the process of step S2902 is executed, the current calculation is performed on the bone animation data corresponding to the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter in step S2903. It is determined whether or not the difference data is set for the target bone data. When the difference data is set (step S2903: YES), the difference data set in the bone animation data in step S2904 is a unit corresponding to the bone data of the current calculation target in the coordinate calculation area 169. It is applied to the coordinate data written in the calculation area, and the applied coordinate data is written in the unit calculation area.

Returning to the description of the calculation process for the bone model display effect (FIG. 58), after executing the coordinate calculation process in step S2810, the value of the unit bone number counter of the work RAM 132 is subtracted by 1 in step S2811. When the value of the unit bone number counter after 1 subtraction is 1 or more (step S2812: NO), the coordinate calculation process (step S2810) is executed for the bone data corresponding to the current value of the unit bone number counter.

When the value of the unit bone number counter is "0" (step S2812: YES), it means that the coordinate calculation processing of all the bone data has been completed for the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter. To do. In this case, the coordinate data update process is executed in step S2813. In the coordinate data update process, the coordinate data corresponding to the current update timing written in the unit calculation area of the coordinate calculation area 169 is made to correspond to the bone display character that is the target of the calculation in the work RAM 132. Write in the reserved area.

In the following step S2814, the coordinate calculation process of the skin data is executed. In the coordinate calculation process of the skin data, the coordinate data of each bone data of the bone display character is referred to while referring to the skin weighting data corresponding to the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter. The coordinate data of each vertex data of the skin data is calculated. Then, the coordinate data is written in the area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to the bone display character that is the target of the calculation this time.

In the following step S2815, for the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter, parameter information other than the coordinate data of the bone data and the coordinate data of the skin data is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is derived. In the work RAM 132, the data is written in the area secured corresponding to the bone display character that is the target of the calculation this time.

After that, in step S2816, the value of the bone model number counter of the work RAM 132 is subtracted by 1. When the value of the bone model number counter after subtracting 1 is 1 or more (step S2817: NO), the processes of steps S2807 to S2816 are executed for the bone display character corresponding to the current value of the bone model number counter. .. When the value of the bone model number counter is "0" (step S2817: YES), in step S2818, the designation information of the bone model display effect for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the bone model display effect is provided. It is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When the arithmetic processing for the bone model display effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609) includes a plurality of bone display characters to be displayed. Information on instructions for using the corresponding skeletal data, skin data, and texture data is set. Further, in the drawing list, parameter information to be applied to each image data is set, including coordinate data of bone data in each bone display character and coordinate data of each vertex data of skin data. Further, the designation information of the bone model display effect is set in the drawing list, and the start designation information of the bone model display effect is set at the start timing of the bone model display effect.

Next, the setting process for the bone model display effect executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for the bone model display effect is executed as a part of the effect setting process executed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the designated information of the bone model display effect is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the bone model display effect is executed.

When the start designation information of the bone model display effect is set in the drawing list this time (step S3001: YES), the information of the address set in the drawing list is used as the display target of this time in the memory module 133. The address of the area where the skeleton data, skin data, and texture data corresponding to the plurality of bone display characters are stored is grasped, and based on the grasped result, these image data are transferred from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134. Read (step S3002).

When a negative determination is made in step S3001 or when the process of step S3002 is executed, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped in step S3003. Further, in step S3004, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each bone data corresponding to each of the bone display characters to be displayed is grasped from the current drawing list, and in step S3005, the display target is set. The coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each vertex data of the skin data corresponding to each of the bone display characters is grasped from the drawing list this time, and each bone display to be displayed is further performed in step S3006. Grasp other parameter information about the character from this drawing list. Then, in step S3007, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed according to the contents corresponding to the grasped results of steps S3003 to S3006.

By executing the setting process for the bone model display effect as described above, the skeleton data and the skin data corresponding to each of the plurality of bone display characters to be displayed this time are arranged in the world coordinate system. At the same time, the coordinate data derived by using the bone weighting data, the skin weighting data and the bone animation data is applied as the coordinate data of each bone data and the skin data. As a result, on the display surface P, the moving image is displayed so that the plurality of bone display characters operate.

<Explanation of set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5>
Here, a set character group CHG is set as one type of bone display character. 61 (a) and 61 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the set character group CHG.

As shown in FIG. 61A, the set character group CHG is composed of a plurality of (specifically, five) set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. As shown in FIG. 61B, each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 has a set skeleton data FRD2 having a plurality of bone data ABD and a plurality of joint data AJD, a set skin data SKD2, and a set. It is displayed using the texture data BTD2. The set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are set to predetermined coordinate data by executing the calculation process for the bone model display effect (FIG. 58) and the setting process for the bone model display effect (FIG. 60) already described. The set skin data SKD2 is applied to the set set skeleton data FRD2, and as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are displayed in 3D in the world coordinate system. Then, by drawing while applying the set texture data BTD2 to the set surface P, the images of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are displayed on the display surface P as shown in FIG. 61 (a). Each of these data FRD2, SKD2, and BTD2 is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as shown in FIG. 56.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is displayed in such a manner that the player recognizes that the characters have the same shape, pattern, and size. These set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are arranged to perform a specific operation around the bone display character CH10, for example, in a situation where the bone display character CH10 is displayed on the display surface P so as to perform a predetermined operation. It is displayed on the display surface P. In this case, the bone display character CH10 performs an operation display indicating the expected degree of giving a profit such as a jackpot result, whereas the operation display indicating such an expected degree of giving is a line in the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. I can't. Then, when the bone model display effect is executed, the player pays attention to the bone display character CH10. Under such circumstances, the bone display character CH10 requires fine movement, whereas the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 do not require fine movement. Therefore, the number of bone data ABDs of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 is set to be smaller than the number of bone data BODs of the bone display character CH10, and is required to display the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. A device for reducing the amount of data and a device for reducing the processing load for displaying each set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are provided.

Hereinafter, the data structure for displaying each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 will be described in detail. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the skeleton data FRD2 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, and FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (c) show a bone display character CH10 and a set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. It is explanatory drawing for comparing each data amount.

As shown in FIG. 62, the number of bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1, the number of bone data ABD11 to ABD20 of the second set unit character CHG2, and the bone data ABD21 to ABD30 of the third set unit character CHG3. The number, the number of bone data ABD31 to ABD40 of the fourth set unit character CHG4, and the number of bone data ABD41 to ABD50 of the fifth set unit character CHG5 are all 10, and all the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 The number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 is 50 in total. Then, the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 are aggregated and set in one set skeleton data FRD2.

The total number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is the same as the total number of bone data BODs of the bone display character CH10. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 63 (a-1) and 63 (a-2), the skeleton data FRD1 displays only one character called the bone display character CH10, and the aggregate skeleton data FRD2 displays the first to fifth characters. Although it is possible to display five characters, the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, the skeleton data FRD1 for displaying the bone display character CH10 and the set skeleton data for displaying each set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. The amount of data is the same as or substantially the same as that of FRD2. In this case, it is possible to reduce the data capacity as compared with the configuration in which the same number of bone data as the bone display character CH10 is set corresponding to each of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. Further, although the header data referred to by VDP135 is attached to each skeleton data FRD1 and FRD2, the skeleton data is not set individually for each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, but one set skeleton. By aggregating as data FRD2, it is possible to reduce such incidental data.

The number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is 50, and these bone data ABD1 to ABD50 are collectively set in one set skeleton data FRD2 for bone display effect. In the calculation process (FIG. 58), the calculation of the coordinate data of each of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 is performed collectively in the same manner as the bone data of one bone display character.

In detail, in the calculation process for bone display effect (FIG. 58), the coordinate data of each bone data is derived to the calculation as described above, but this calculation is included in one skeleton data. The bone data are collectively read out and collectively processed (steps S2808 to S2813). Then, in this calculation process, the coordinate calculation area 169 provided in the work RAM 132 is used, and the unit capable of storing the data for calculating the coordinate data of each bone data in the coordinate calculation area 169. The number of calculation areas is 50. On the other hand, the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 are aggregated and set in one set skeleton data FRD2 as described above, and the total number of the bone data ABD1 to ADB50 is the coordinates. It is less than or equal to the total number of unit calculation areas in the calculation area 169. Therefore, when calculating the coordinate data of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, it is possible to read the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 at once and execute the calculation process. Therefore, data is read out individually for each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5, and after the calculation of the coordinate data of the bone data for one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is completed, the next set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 The processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the coordinate data of the bone data is calculated.

In a configuration in which the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are aggregated in one set skeleton data FRD2, the relationship between the parent target and the child target of each bone data ABD1 to ABD50 is different. Is set between. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62, the number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is the same, and further, as shown in FIG. 61B, each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. Since the arrangement modes of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 in the above are the same, the skeletons of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 have the same shape and the same size. In this case, each bone data ABD1 to ABD50 included in the same group G1 to G10 in FIG. 62 corresponds to a skeleton portion at the same position in each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. For example, the first bone data ABD1, the eleventh bone data ABD11, the 21st bone data ABD21, the 31st bone data ABD31, and the 41st bone data ABD41 included in the first group G1 are in the corresponding set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, respectively. It corresponds to the skeleton part of the head, and the 10th bone data ABD10, the 20th bone data ABD20, the 30th bone data ABD30, the 40th bone data ABD40, and the 50th bone data ABD50 included in the 10th group G10 correspond to each other. The set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 correspond to the skeleton portion of the right foot.

In each of the groups G1 to G10, the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 are set in a parental relationship with the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the second and fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. There is. For example, in the first group G1, the first bone data ABD1 of the first set unit character CHG1 is the eleventh bone data ABD11, the 21st bone data ABD21, and the 31st bone data ABD31 of the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. And the relationship of the parent target is set for each of the 41st bone data ABD41.

On the other hand, other than that, the relationship between the parent target and the child target in both the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the same set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 and the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of different set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. Is not set. For example, the relationship between the parent target and the child target is not set between the first to tenth bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1. Further, for example, between the 11th bone data ABD11, the 21st bone data ABD21, the 31st bone data ABD31, and the 41st bone data ABD41 of the 2nd to 5th set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5 in the 1st group G1, a parent target and a child target. The relationship with is not set.

In the configuration in which the relationship between the parent target and the child target is set as described above, the set bone weighted data BWD2 (see FIG. 56) stored in the memory module 133 is the bone data ABD1 of the first set unit character CHG1. When the difference data of the coordinate data is applied to any of ~ ABD10, the other set unit characters CHG2 to be included in the same group G1 to G10 as the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 to which the difference data is applied. It is set to be applied as it is to the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of CHG5. Therefore, the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5 follow the movement of the first set unit character CHG1.

On the other hand, since the relationship between the parent target and the child target is not set between the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1, the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of one of the first set unit character CHG1 has moved. Even so, the other bone data ABD1 to ABD10 do not move following it. This also applies to the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. Further, since the relationship between the parent target and the child target is not set between the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5, for example, the bone data ABD11 to ABD20 of the second set unit character CHG2. Even if is moved, the bone data ABD31 to ABD50 of the third to fifth set unit characters CHG3 to CHG5 do not move following it. As a matter of course, since the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 have a parental relationship with the bone data ABD11 to ABD20 of the second set unit character CHG2, the second set unit character CHG2 Even if the bone data ABD11 to ABD20 move, the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 do not move following it.

See FIGS. 64 and 65 for the operation contents of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 when the set bone animation data BAD2 for operating the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 and the set bone animation data BAD2 are used. I will explain while. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the set bone animation data BAD2, and FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the operation contents of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5.

As shown in FIG. 64, pointer information corresponding to one update timing of an image is set in the set bone animation data BAD2, and difference data is set corresponding to each pointer information. For the pointer information of "0" to "m", the difference data is set only for the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1. The difference data corresponds to data that is moved in one direction while maintaining the shape of the first set unit character CHG1.

During the period in which the difference data is set, each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is displayed as a moving image as shown in FIG. 65A. Specifically, at the initial display positions of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, as shown in FIG. 65 (a-1), the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are predetermined in the same shape as each other. They are evenly spaced in the direction. In this case, when the difference data set in the pointer information of "0" to "m" is applied to the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1, the difference data is used as it is in the second to second. Since it is applied to the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5, as shown in FIG. 65 (a-2), each set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are unidirectionally maintained in shape and spacing. Moving.

Returning to the description of the set bone animation data BAD2 shown in FIG. 64, the pointer information of “m + 1” to “n” is not only for the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1, but also for the first set. Difference data is also set for the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the 2nd to 5th set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5. These difference data correspond to the data of moving in one direction while maintaining the shape of the first set unit character CHG1, and maintaining the shape of the second set unit character CHG2 and the fourth set unit character CHG4. It corresponds to the data to be moved in the direction opposite to the one direction as it is, and the third set unit character CHG3 and the fifth set unit character CHG5 correspond to the data to change the shape.

During the period in which the difference data is set, each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is displayed as a moving image as shown in FIG. 65B. Specifically, from the state in which each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (b-1), the first to fifth set unit characters are displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (b-2). The distance between the second set unit character CHG2 and the third set unit character CHG3 and the distance between the fourth set unit character CHG4 and the fifth set unit character CHG5 while moving in one direction as a whole of CHG1 to CHG5. Is shortened, and the shapes of the third set unit character CHG3 and the fifth set unit character CHG5 are changed.

Next, the amount of data of the set skin data SKD2 and the set texture data BTD2 will be described.

A common set skin data SKD2 is set for the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, and a common set texture data BTD2 is set. That is, the set skin data SKD2 is set as data applied to the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. Furthermore, the aggregate skin data SKD2 is set as data applied to 10 bone data. When the set skin data SKD2 is applied to the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the first to fifth set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, the one set skin data SKD2 read from the memory module 133 is the first. It is applied to each of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the 1st to 5th set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5.

The coordinate data of each vertex data ATD of the set skin data SKD2 for performing the application is determined by referring to the set skin weighting data SWD2 stored in the memory module 133. In the set skin weighting data SWD2, the correspondence between the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 and the set skin data SKD2, the bone data ABD11 to ABD20 of the second set unit character CHG2 and the set skin data SKD2 Correspondence with, Bone data ABD21 to ABD30 of the third set unit character CHG3 and skin data for gathering SKD2, Correspondence between bone data ABD31 to ABD40 of the fourth set unit character CHG4 and skin data for set SKD2 , And the correspondence between the bone data ABD41 to ABD50 of the fifth set unit character CHG5 and the set skin data SKD2 is set.

In a configuration in which the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the first set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are aggregated into one set skeleton data FRD2, the set skin data SKD2 is the bone data of one set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. By being set as the data applied to ABD1 to ABD50, as shown in FIGS. 63 (b-1) and 63 (b-2), the skin data SKD1 for displaying the bone display character CH10 can be used. On the other hand, the aggregate skin data SKD2 has a data amount of 1/5.

Similarly, for the set texture data BTD2, the set texture data BTD2 is set as data applied to one set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. Then, when the set texture data BTD2 is applied to display the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, the one set texture data BTD2 read from the memory module 133 is the first to fifth set unit characters. It is applied to each of CHG1 to CHG5. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 63 (c-1) and 63 (c-2), the set texture data BTD2 is 1/5 of the texture data BTD1 for displaying the bone display character CH10. It is the amount of data.

In the calculation process for the bone model display effect (FIG. 58), when the coordinate data of the bone data of a plurality of bone display characters is calculated, the data corresponding to the bone data included in one skeleton data is the coordinate calculation of the work RAM 132. After reading all together in the use area 169 and completing the calculation of the coordinate data for these bone data, the calculation of the coordinate data of the bone data is performed for the next skeleton data. As a result, the operation of the coordinate data is performed in units of one skeleton data, and various settings for calculating the coordinate data of the bone data included in the one skeleton data are executed in multiple times. In comparison, the processing load can be reduced in that the number of times the processing of step S2808 and step S2809 is executed can be suppressed.

For a plurality of set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 that do not require fine movement control, the number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 is suppressed to a small number, and the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 are one. It is aggregated and set in the aggregate skeleton data FRD2. As a result, when calculating the coordinate data of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of a plurality of set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, it is possible to collectively perform the coordinate calculation of the bone data ABD1 to ABD50, and the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 It is possible to reduce the processing load as compared with the configuration in which various settings for calculating the coordinate data are performed for each time.

In a configuration in which the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 are aggregated and set in one set skeleton data FRD2, the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 are the second to fifth sets. The bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of the unit characters CHG2 to CHG5 are set to have a parental relationship. As a result, all of the first to fifth set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 can be integrally moved by simply setting the coordinate data for the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 in the set bone animation data BAD2. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, it is possible to integrally move the first to fifth set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 while suppressing the amount of data of the set bone animation data BAD2 to be small. On the other hand, it is possible to adjust the coordinate data of the bone data ABD11 to ABD50 of each child target while not affecting the coordinate data of the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the parent target. As a result, it is possible to move all of the first to fifth set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 integrally by simply setting the coordinate data for the bone data ABD1 to ABD10 of the first set unit character CHG1 as described above. However, it is possible to individually change the display positions of the second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5.

The set skin data SKD2 is set as data applied to one set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, and the same set skin data SKD2 is applied to each set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data required to store skin data in advance. Similarly, the set texture data BTD2 is set as data applied to one set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, and the same set texture data BTD2 is applied to each set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5. To. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data required to store the texture data in advance.

<Another form of configuration related to bone model display production>
The total number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 may be smaller than the total number of bone data BODs of the bone display character CH10, or may be large. Further, the total number of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5 may be smaller than the number of unit calculation areas of the coordinate calculation area 169.

-The relationship between the parent target and the child target may be set between the bone data ABD1 to ABD50 of one set unit character CHG1 to CHG5. In this case, the operation of each set unit character CHG1 to CHG5 can be expressed more realistically.

-The relationship between the parent target and the child target may be set between the bone data included in the first skeleton data and the bone data included in the second skeleton data. In this case, if one of the character displayed by the first skeleton data and the character displayed by the second skeleton data is moved, the other character can be moved following the movement. ..

The number and arrangement of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 are not limited to the same in each of the set unit characters CHG1 to CHG5, and at least one of the number and arrangement of bone data ABD1 to ABD50 is different. However, the configuration may be such that the numbers and arrangement modes are substantially the same.

The parameter information calculated collectively for a plurality of individual images after the setting to the pre-derivation state in step S2808 and step S2809 in the arithmetic processing (FIG. 58) for the bone model display effect in the display CPU 131 is the coordinate data of the skeleton data. It is not limited to, and may be other parameter information such as rotation angle, scale, light information, and camera information.

<Structure for displaying plane shadows>
Next, a configuration for performing a plane shadow display will be described. 66 (a) and 66 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the contents of the plane shadow display. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the memory module 133 necessary for performing the plane shadow display.

In the plane shadow display, as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), the effect character CH11 recognized by the player as representing a person having a face, a torso, both hands, and both feet walks. This is a display content for displaying the shadow image CH12 of the effect character CH11 with respect to the ground image BG representing the ground in the situation where the moving moving image is displayed. The display content of the shadow image CH 12 changes according to the movement of the effect character CH 11. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66A, in the display content in which the effect character CH11 has the left arm forward and the right arm rearward, the shadow image CH12 having a corresponding shape is displayed, and FIG. 66B ), The shadow image CH12 having the corresponding shape is displayed in the display content in which the effect character CH11 has the right arm forward and the left arm rearward.

As shown in FIG. 67, as the image data for displaying the effect character CH11, the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD are stored in advance in the memory module 133. Further, as image data for displaying the ground image BG, the ground object data BGD and the ground texture data BGTD are stored in advance in the memory module 133. Further, as image data for displaying the shadow image CH12, the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD and the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are stored in advance in the memory module 133.

When displaying the shadow image CH12, in the world coordinate system, the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD includes the character object data COD for displaying the effect character CH11 and the ground object data BGD for displaying the ground image BG. Placed between. The plate-shaped object data BSD for plane shadows is object data that is configured in a flat shape with no wall thickness and has a smaller number of polygons per unit display surface than a normal object having a wall thickness for displaying characters such as people. is there. Then, the shadow image CH12 is displayed by applying the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 for displaying the shadow image CH12 to the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD.

The plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is arranged at a position separated above the ground object data BGD by a distance of X minutes (specifically, one pixel) in the world coordinate system, and is arranged in a position separated above the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BGD. The object data COD for the character is arranged above the object data BSD. By arranging the flat shadow plate-shaped object data BSD at a position separated upward from the ground object data BGD in this way, the shadow image CH12 is reliably displayed above the ground image BG. A plurality of types of plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are set. Specifically, the first plane shadow texture data BST1 for displaying the shadow image CH12 having the shape shown in FIG. 66A and FIG. 66 ( The second plane shadow texture data BST2 for displaying the shadow image CH12 having the shape shown in b) is set.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the plane shadow display will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process for displaying a plane shadow executed by the display CPU 131. The arithmetic processing for displaying the plane shadow is executed in the effect arithmetic processing of step S2209 in the task processing (FIG. 42). The arithmetic processing for the plane shadow display is started when the information about the plane shadow display is set in the currently set execution target table.

When it is the start timing of the plane shadow display (step S3101: YES), each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for performing the plane shadow display is grasped (step S3102). The image data includes character object data COD, character texture data CTD, ground object data BGD, ground texture data BGTD, plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD, first plane shadow texture data BST1 and second. Texture data BST2 for plane shadows is included. After that, in step S3103, the start designation information of the plane shadow display for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the plane shadow display should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When a negative determination is made in step S3101 or the process of step S3103 is executed, the ground object data BGD and the ground object data BGD and the ground data are used as the data to be used this time based on the execution target table currently set in step S3104. Grasp the texture data BGTD. Then, the parameter information is calculated and derived for the ground object data BGD and the ground texture data BGTD, and the derived parameter information is written in the work RAM 132 in the area secured corresponding to the image data BGD and BGTD. (Step S3105). In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the ground object data BGD is updated so that the ground image BG can be displayed over a predetermined range.

Further, in step S3106, the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD are grasped as the data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table. Then, the parameter information is calculated and derived for the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD, and the derived parameter information is written in the work RAM 132 in the area secured corresponding to the image data COD and CTD. (Step S3107). In this case, the character CH11 is displayed as if it is moving while alternately repeating the first display mode shown in FIG. 66 (a) and the second display mode shown in FIG. 66 (b). Object data The coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of COD is updated.

After that, in step S3108, the plate-shaped object data BSD for plane shadow is grasped as the data to be used this time based on the execution target table currently set. In the following step S3109, it is determined whether or not the current update timing is the first shadow display period. The first shadow display period is the period in which the first plane shadow texture data BST1 is used as the texture data for displaying the shadow image CH12, and the second shadow display period is the period in which the texture data for displaying the shadow image CH12 is used. This is the period during which the texture data BST2 for the second plane shadow is used. In the case of the first shadow display period (step S3109: YES), the texture data BST1 for the first plane shadow is grasped in step S3110, and in the case of the second shadow display period (step S3109: NO), in step S3111. Grasp the texture data BST2 for the second plane shadow.

The first shadow display period and the second shadow display period are the image data for displaying the shadow image CH 12 when the effect character CH 11 is in the first display mode as shown in FIG. 66 (a). To display the shadow image CH12 when the first plane shadow texture data BST1 corresponding to the first display mode is used and the effect character CH 11 is in the second display mode as shown in FIG. 66 (b). The second plane shadow texture data BST2 corresponding to the second display mode is set to be used as the image data of. That is, when the effect character CH11 is displayed so as to move and the display mode is alternately switched between the first display mode and the second display mode, it is used according to the switching of the display mode. The texture data BST1 and BST2 for plane shadows are switched.

When the process of step S3110 is executed or the process of step S3111 is executed, in step S3112, parameter information is provided for the flat shadow plate-shaped object data BSD and the flat shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 to be used this time. It is calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is written in the work RAM 132 in the area secured corresponding to these image data BSD, BST1 and BST2. After that, in step S3113, the plane shadow display designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the plane shadow display is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

In this case, the shadow image CH12 can be displayed below the effect character CH11 as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b) as the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of the flat shadow plate-shaped object data BSD. As possible, the coordinate data corresponding to the coordinate data of the character object data COD grasped in step S3107 is grasped. Further, the coordinate data grasped in this case is for the ground grasped in step S3105 so that the plate-shaped object data BDS for plane shadows is arranged at a position away from the ground image BG by one pixel. The coordinate data corresponds to the coordinate data of the object data BGD.

Here, as described above, the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are applied to the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD, and the application position is determined by using the UV coordinate data. Specifically, the base UV coordinate data is set in the plate-shaped object data BSD for the plane shadow, and the UV coordinate data is set in the texture data BST1 and BST2 for the plane shadow. Then, the color information of the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 is applied so that the UV coordinate data of the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 correspond to the base UV coordinate data of the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD. In this case, since the UV coordinate data is set as fixed data in the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2, the UV coordinate data cannot be changed in the display CPU 131. On the other hand, the base UV coordinate data of the plate-shaped object data BD for plane shadow can be changed by the display CPU 131, but the base UV coordinate data is not changed during the execution period of the plane shadow display. For example, the base UV coordinate data and the UV coordinate data are constant in both the first shadow display period and the second shadow display period. As a result, even if the effect character CH11 is displayed to move and the coordinate data of the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is changed accordingly, the plane shadow in each pixel of the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD The application target of the texture data BST1 and BST2 is not changed.

When the arithmetic processing for displaying the plane shadow is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609) includes the character object data COD, the character texture data CTD, and the drawing list. Information on usage instructions for ground object data BGD, ground texture data BGTD, and plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is set, and during the first shadow display period, usage instructions for the first plane shadow texture data BST1 are set. Information is set, and if it is the second shadow display period, the information of the usage instruction of the texture data BST2 for the second plane shadow is set. In addition, parameter information applied to each of these image data is set in the drawing list. Further, the plane shadow display designation information is set in the drawing list, and the plane shadow display start designation information is set at the start timing of the plane shadow display.

Next, the setting process for displaying the plane shadow executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 69. The setting process for displaying the plane shadow is executed as a part of the setting process for the effect executed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the plane shadow display designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for plane shadow display is executed.

When the plane shadow display start designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S3201: YES), the memory module 133 is the display target of this time from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The address where various image data is stored is grasped, and based on the grasped result, various image data are read from the memory module 133 into the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S3202). The image data includes character object data COD, character texture data CTD, ground object data BGD, ground texture data BGTD, plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD, first plane shadow texture data BST1 and second. Texture data BST2 for plane shadows is included.

When a negative determination is made in step S3201 or when the process of step S3202 is executed, in step S3203, the ground object data BGD and the ground texture data BGTD are grasped as the data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. .. Further, in step S3204, the parameter information of the ground object data BGD and the ground texture data BGTD is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, various parameter information including the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the ground object data BGD is grasped.

After that, in step S3205, the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD are grasped as data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. Further, in step S3206, the parameter information of the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, in order to display the effect character CH 11 as if it is moving while alternately repeating the first display mode shown in FIG. 66 (a) and the second display mode shown in FIG. 66 (b). Character object data Grasp various parameter information including coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of COD.

After that, in step S3207, the plate-shaped object data BD for plane shadow is grasped as the data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. Further, in step S3208, the coordinate data of the plate-shaped object data BD for the plane shadow is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B, the coordinates of each pixel of the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD for displaying the shadow image CH12 below the effect character CH11 in the world coordinate system. Grasp the data. Further, the coordinate data grasped in this case is for the ground grasped in step S3204 so that the plate-shaped object data BDS for plane shadows is arranged at a position away from the ground image BG by one pixel. The coordinate data corresponds to the coordinate data of the object data BGD. Further, in step S3209, with respect to the plate-shaped object data BD for plane shadow, parameter information other than the coordinate data is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, the fixed base UV coordinate data applied to the flat shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is grasped based on the drawing list.

After that, in step S3210, the texture data for plane shadows BST1 and BST2 corresponding to the current shadow display period are grasped as the data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. Further, in step S3211, the fixed UV coordinate data applied to the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 is grasped from the texture data BST1 and BST2. Further, in step S3212, parameter information other than the UV coordinate data applied to the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 is grasped based on the current drawing list.

After that, in step S3213, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed according to the contents corresponding to the grasped results of steps S3203 to S3212.

By executing the setting process for displaying the plane shadow as described above, the object data BGD for the ground, the object data COD for the character, and the plate-shaped object data BSD for the plane shadow are arranged in the world coordinate system, and the display CPU 131. Various parameter information including the coordinate data derived by the calculation is applied to each object data BGD, COD, and BSD. Further, the corresponding texture data BGTD, CTD, BST1 and BST2 are applied to each object data BGD, COD and BSD. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B, the display surface P displays a moving image as if the effect character CH11 is walking and moving on the ground image BG, and is used for effect. A moving image is displayed so that the shadow image CH 12 follows while being deformed according to the movement of the character CH 11.

When the shadow image CH12 is displayed so as to follow the effect character CH11 as described above, the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is arranged below the character object data COD, and the plane shadow plate-shaped object is displayed. This is a configuration in which the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are applied to the data BSD. As a result, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the shadow image is displayed by calculation in relation to the light source data. Further, it is assumed that the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are directly applied to the ground object data BGD, but since the ground texture data BGTD is applied to the ground object data BGD, the shadow image CH12 If an attempt is made to move the image according to the effect character CH11, the relationship between the base UV coordinate data and the UV coordinate data becomes complicated. On the other hand, the position of the plate-shaped object data BD for plane shadow is changed in correspondence with the change of the position of the object data COD for character, and the texture data for plane shadow is added to the plate-shaped object data BSD for plane shadow. By applying BST1 and BST2, it is possible to display the shadow image CH12 without causing such an inconvenience.

In a configuration in which object data is provided separately from the ground object data BGD in order to display the shadow image CH12, the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is a plane shadow plate-shaped object data configured in a flat shape without wall thickness. It is BSD. As a result, it is possible to suppress the data capacity required for storing the image data in advance in the memory module 133.

The plate-shaped object data BSD for the plane shadow is arranged at a position separated from the object data BGD for the ground by one pixel. This makes it possible to display the shadow image CH12 while preventing it from being buried in the ground image BG.

In a configuration in which the shape of the shadow image CH12 is changed according to the change in the display mode of the effect character CH11, a plurality of plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are provided and used in correspondence with the display mode of the effect character CH11. The target plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 are changed. This makes it possible to change the shape of the shadow image CH 12 while reducing the processing load.

<Another form of configuration related to plane shadow display>
In the above embodiment, by changing the types of the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 applied to the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD, the shape of the shadow image CH12 is changed according to the change in the display mode of the effect character CH11. However, in this different form, as shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the type of the plane shadow texture data BST3 applied to the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is changed. The shape of the shadow image CH12 is changed by changing the shape of the flat shadow plate-shaped object data BDSD.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for changing the shape of the shadow image CH12 by changing the shape of the flat shadow plate-shaped object data BSD will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process for displaying a plane shadow executed by the display CPU 131 in the present alternative mode.

When it is the start timing of the plane shadow display (step S3301: YES), each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for performing the plane shadow display is grasped (step S3302). The image data includes character object data COD, character texture data CTD, ground object data BGD, ground texture data BGTD, plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD, and plane shadow texture data BST3. After that, in step S3303, the start designation information of the plane shadow display for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the plane shadow display should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When a negative determination is made in step S3301 or the process of step S3303 is executed, the ground object data BGD and the ground object data BGD and the ground data are used as the data to be used this time based on the execution target table currently set in step S3304. Grasp the texture data BGTD. Then, the parameter information is calculated and derived for the ground object data BGD and the ground texture data BGTD, and the derived parameter information is written in the work RAM 132 in the area secured corresponding to the image data BGD and BGTD. (Step S3305). In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the ground object data BGD is updated so that the ground image BG can be displayed over a predetermined range.

Further, in step S3306, the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD are grasped as the data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table. Then, the parameter information is calculated and derived for the character object data COD and the character texture data CTD, and the derived parameter information is written in the work RAM 132 in the area secured corresponding to the image data COD and CTD. (Step S3307). In this case, the character CH11 is displayed as if it is moving while alternately repeating the first display mode shown in FIG. 70 (a) and the second display mode shown in FIG. 70 (b). Object data The coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of COD is updated.

After that, in step S3308, the plate-shaped object data BSD for plane shadow is grasped as the data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table. In the following step S3309, it is determined whether or not the current update timing is the first shadow display period. During the first shadow display period, as shown in FIG. 70A, the flat shadow plate-shaped object data BDD is provided so that the shape of the shadow image CH12 becomes the first shape mode corresponding to the first display mode of the effect character CH11. It is a period in which the first shape data is used as the shape data to be applied, and in the second shadow display period, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), the shape of the shadow image CH 12 corresponds to the second display mode of the effect character CH 11. It is a period during which the second shape data is used as the shape data applied to the plate-shaped object data BD for the plane shadow so as to have the two shape modes. In the case of the first shadow display period (step S3309: YES), the first shape data is grasped in step S3310, and in the case of the second shadow display period (step S3309: NO), the second shape data in step S3311. To grasp. The shape data grasped in step S3310 or step S3311 is written in the area secured in the work RAM 132 in correspondence with the plane shadow plate-shaped object data BSD and the plane shadow texture data BST3.

When the process of step S3310 is executed or the process of step S3311 is executed, the texture data BST3 for plane shadow is grasped as the data to be used this time based on the execution target table currently set in step S3312. .. After that, in step S3313, parameter information other than the shape data of the flat shadow plate-shaped object data BSD is calculated and derived for the flat shadow plate-shaped object data BSD and the flat shadow texture data BST3, and the derived parameter information is derived. Is written in the area secured in the work RAM 132 corresponding to these image data BSD and BST3. After that, in step S3314, the plane display designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the plane shadow display is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

According to the above alternative form, the shape of the shadow image CH12 is changed by changing the shape of the plate-shaped object data BSD for the plane shadow, instead of changing the type of the texture data BST3 for the plane shadow. It is possible to change the shape of the shadow image CH12 according to the display mode of the effect character CH11 while suppressing the data capacity required for storing the plane shadow texture data BST3 in advance.

<Further alternative form of configuration related to plane shadow display>
In a configuration in which texture data BST1 and BST2 for plane shadows are provided corresponding to each display mode of the effect character CH11, the first display mode is a display mode when the effect character CH11 is displayed so as to move. In addition to the second display mode, there may be a display mode corresponding to the operation path between these display modes. In this case, the texture data BST1 and BST2 for plane shadows may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode, and according to such a configuration, the display mode of the shadow image CH12 is displayed by the effect character CH11. It is possible to associate the aspects in detail. On the other hand, the texture data BST1 for the first plane shadow is used for each display mode (including the first display mode) included in the first display mode group corresponding to the predetermined first operation period, and the predetermined second display mode is used. The texture data BST2 for the second plane shadow may be used for each display mode (including the second display mode) included in the second display mode group corresponding to the operation period. In this case, it is possible to make the display mode of the shadow image CH 12 correspond to the display mode of the effect character CH 11 to some extent while suppressing the data capacity for storing the plane shadow texture data BST1 and BST2 in advance.

In a configuration in which the shape data of the plate-shaped object data BD for the plane shadow is provided corresponding to each display mode of the effect character CH 11, the display mode is the case where the effect character CH 11 is displayed so as to move. In addition to the first display mode and the second display mode, there may be a display mode corresponding to the operation path between these display modes. In this case, the shape data of the plate-shaped object data BD for plane shadow may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each display mode, whereby the display mode of the shadow image CH12 may be displayed by the effect character CH11. It is possible to associate the modes in detail. On the other hand, the first shape data is used for each display mode (including the first display mode) included in the first display mode group corresponding to the predetermined first operation period, and corresponds to the predetermined second operation period. The second shape data may be used for each display mode (including the second display mode) included in the second display mode group. In this case, it is possible to make the display mode of the shadow image CH 12 correspond to the display mode of the effect character CH 11 to some extent while suppressing the data capacity for storing the shape data in advance.

-The object data provided separately from the ground object data BGD for displaying the shadow image CH12 is not limited to the plate-shaped object data, and is configured in a thick three-dimensional shape like the character object data COD. It may be the object data that has been created.

-A configuration for displaying the shadow image CH12 of the effect character CH11 using object data provided separately from the ground object data BGD, and displaying a reflection image showing how the effect character CH11 is reflected on the water surface. You may use it to do so.

<Structure for displaying step shadows>
Next, a configuration for displaying a step shadow will be described. FIG. 72 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the step shadow display, and FIG. 72 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data configuration of the memory module 133 required for performing the step shadow display. is there.

As shown in FIG. 72A, the step shadow display is a moving image of the production character CH13, which is recognized by the player as representing a person having a face, a torso, both hands, and both feet, using the stairs. This is a display content for displaying the shadow image CH14 of the effect character CH13 with respect to the staircase image SG representing the stairs in the situation where the display is performed. In this case, the shadow image CH14 is displayed so as to follow the shape of the stairs. Specifically, the shadow image CH14 is displayed from one tread to the tread immediately below it, and the shadow image CH14 has a stepped shape in correspondence with the step caused by kicking between the treads. It is displayed in.

The display content of the shadow image CH14 changes according to the movement of the effect character CH13. Specifically, as the effect character CH13 climbs the stairs, the range in which the shadow image CH14 is displayed on one tread changes, and the type of tread to be displayed on the shadow image CH14 also changes. For example, in a situation where the shadow image CH14 is displayed in a stepped shape over two consecutive treads and a rise connecting between them, the effect character CH13 moves up the stairs, and the lower side of the shadow image CH14 is displayed. The range in which the shadow image CH14 is displayed on the tread gradually decreases, and the range in which the shadow image CH14 is displayed on the upper tread gradually increases. Then, a part of the shadow image CH14 is displayed on the upper tread via the state where the shadow image CH14 is displayed over the upper tread and the rise continuous to the tread.

As image data for displaying the effect character CH13, as shown in FIG. 72B, the character object data COD1 and the character texture data CTD1 are stored in advance in the memory module 133. Further, as image data for displaying the staircase image SG, the staircase object data SGD and the staircase texture data SGTD are stored in advance in the memory module 133. Further, as image data for displaying the shadow image CH14, the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD and the step shadow texture data SST are stored in advance in the memory module 133.

When displaying the shadow image CH14, in the world coordinate system, the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD includes the character object data COD1 for displaying the effect character CH13 and the staircase object data SGD for displaying the staircase image SG. Placed between. The plate-shaped object data SSD for step shadow is an object in which a flat object having no wall thickness is made into a step shape according to the shape of the stairs, and is a normal object having a wall thickness for displaying a character such as a person. This is object data in which the number of polygons per unit display surface is smaller than that of the object data. The plate-shaped object data SSD for step shadows is set to a size smaller than the object data SGD for stairs, and corresponds to a part of the stairs portion displayed by the stairs image SG where the shadow image CH14 can be displayed. Is set. Then, the shadow image CH14 is displayed by applying the step shadow texture data SST to the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD.

The step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD is arranged at a position separated above the staircase object data SGD by a predetermined distance (specifically, one pixel) in the world coordinate system, and the step shadow plate shape The character object data COD1 is arranged above the object data SSD. By arranging the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD at a position separated upward from the staircase object data SGD in this way, the shadow image CH14 is reliably displayed above the staircase image SG.

Only one type of texture data SST for step shadow is set. When the shadow image CH14 is moved according to the movement of the effect character CH13, the position where the step shadow texture data SST is applied to the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD is set according to the movement of the effect character CH13. Change. Specifically, when applying the predetermined color information of the step shadow texture data SST to the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD, the base UV coordinate data corresponding to the UV coordinate data set in the color information is set. In the configuration in which the color information is applied to the pixels of the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD, the base UV coordinate data of the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD is changed according to the movement of the effect character CH13. , The position where the step shadow texture data SST is applied changes in the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD. For example, for the pixels of the plate-shaped object data SSD for step shadows whose base UV coordinate data is set to (1,1), the texture data for step shadows whose UV coordinate data is set to (1,1). In the configuration to which the color information of SST is applied, by changing the pixel at which the base UV coordinate data is set to (1,1), the texture for step shadow is obtained with respect to the plate-shaped object data SSD for step shadow. The position where the data SST is applied will change. The base UV coordinate data of the plate-shaped object data SSD for step shadow can be changed in the display CPU 131, but the UV coordinate data is changed in the display CPU 131 because it is set as fixed data in the texture data SST for step shadow. Can't.

As shown in FIG. 72B, animation data UAD for UV coordinates is stored in advance in the memory module 133 as data for changing the base UV coordinate data of the plate-shaped object data SSD for step shadows at each update timing of the image. Has been done. The animation data UAD for UV coordinates has a one-to-one correspondence with each update timing during the period in which the effect character CH13 is displayed as a moving image on the stairs, and the base UV coordinates of the plate-shaped object data SSD for step shadows. The data for changing the data is set. The data to be changed is the data for each base UV coordinate data set in each pixel of the plate-shaped object data SSD for step shadow so that the base UV coordinate data is shifted by the same amount in a certain direction. It is the data of the value to be added. By using the animation data UAD for UV coordinates, the base UV coordinate data of each pixel of the plate-shaped object data SSD for step shadows is shifted by the same amount in a certain direction at each update timing. Then, by applying the texture data SST for step shadow using a constant UV coordinate data at each update timing, the shadow image CH14 is moved and displayed in a constant direction by the same amount at each update timing. Become.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying the step shadow will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process for displaying a step shadow executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for displaying the step shadow is executed in the effect calculation process of step S2209 in the task process (FIG. 42). The arithmetic processing for the step shadow display is started when the information about the step shadow display is set in the currently set execution target table.

When it is the start timing of the step shadow display (step S3401: YES), the animation data UAD for UV coordinates is read from the memory module 133 to the work RAM 132 (step S3402). In addition, each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for displaying the step shadow is grasped (step S3403). The image data includes character object data COD1, character texture data CTD1, staircase object data SGD, staircase texture data SGTD, step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD, and step shadow texture data SSD. After that, in step S3404, the step shadow display start designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the step shadow display should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When a negative determination is made in step S3401 or the process of step S3404 is executed, the object data SGD for stairs and the data for stairs are used as the data to be used this time based on the execution target table currently set in step S3405. Grasp the texture data SGTD. Then, the parameter information is calculated and derived from the staircase object data SGD and the staircase texture data SGTD, and the derived parameter information is written in the work RAM 132 in the area secured corresponding to the image data SGD and SGTD. (Step S3406). In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the staircase object data SGD is updated so that the staircase image SG can be displayed over a predetermined range.

Further, in step S3407, the character object data COD1 and the character texture data CTD1 are grasped as the data to be used this time based on the execution target table currently set. Then, the parameter information is calculated and derived for the character object data COD1 and the character texture data CTD1, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to the image data COD1 and CTD1 in the work RAM 132. (Step S3408). In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the character object data COD1 is updated so that the appearance of the effect character CH13 climbing the stairs is displayed as a moving image (see FIG. 72A).

After that, in step S3409, the plate-shaped object data SSD for step shadow is grasped as the data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table. In the following step S3410, the data of the increase in the base UV coordinate data corresponding to the current update timing is read from the UV coordinate animation data UAD already read in the work RAM 132, and the read data is used as the current base UV coordinate data. By adding, the base UV coordinate data corresponding to this update timing is derived. Then, the derived base UV coordinate data is written in the work RAM 132 in the area secured corresponding to the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD.

After that, in step S3411, the texture data SST for step shadow is grasped as the data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table. In the following step S3412, parameter information other than the base UV coordinate data in the plate-shaped object data SSD for step shadow and parameter information of texture data SST for step shadow are calculated and derived, and the derived parameter information is obtained in these images in the work RAM 132. Data Write in the area secured corresponding to SSD and SST. After that, in step S3413, the step shadow display designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the step shadow display is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

In this case, the character object data grasped in step S3408 so that the shadow image CH12 can be displayed below the effect character CH11 as the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD. Grasp the coordinate data corresponding to the coordinate data of COD1. Further, the coordinate data grasped in this case is for the stairs grasped in step S3406 so that the plate-shaped object data SSD for step shadow is arranged at a position away from the staircase image SG by one pixel. Object data Coordinate data corresponding to the coordinate data of SGD.

When the arithmetic processing for displaying the step shadow is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609) includes the character object data COD1 and the character texture data CTD1. Information on usage instructions of the staircase object data SGD, the staircase texture data SGTD, the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD, and the step shadow texture data SST is set. In addition, parameter information applied to each of these image data is set in the drawing list. Further, step shadow display designation information is set in the drawing list, and step shadow display start designation information is set at the step shadow display start timing.

Next, the setting process for displaying the step shadow executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74. The setting process for displaying the step shadow is executed as a part of the setting process for the effect executed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the step shadow display designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for step shadow display is executed.

When the step shadow display start designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S3501: YES), the memory module 133 is the display target of this time from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The address of the area where various image data is stored is grasped, and based on the grasped result, various image data are read out from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S3502). The image data includes character object data COD1, character texture data CTD1, staircase object data SGD, staircase texture data SGTD, step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD, and step shadow texture data SSD.

When a negative determination is made in step S3501 or when the process of step S3502 is executed, the object data SGD for stairs and the texture data SGTD for stairs are grasped as data to be displayed in step S3503 based on the current drawing list. .. Further, in step S3504, the parameter information of the data SGD and SGTD is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, various parameter information including the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the staircase object data SGD is grasped.

After that, in step S3505, the character object data COD1 and the character texture data CTD1 are grasped as the data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. Further, in step S3506, the parameter information of the data COD1 and CTD1 is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, various parameter information including the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the character object data COD1 is displayed so that the appearance of the effect character CH13 climbing the stairs is displayed as a moving image (see FIG. 72 (a)). Grasp.

After that, in step S3507, the plate-shaped object data SSD for step shadow is grasped as the data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. Further, in step S3508, the base UV coordinate data of the plate-shaped object data SSD for step shadow is grasped based on the drawing list of this time, and in step S3509, other parameter information applied to the data SSD is grasped. In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD for displaying the shadow image CH14 below the effect character CH13 is grasped. Further, the coordinate data grasped in this case is for the stairs grasped in step S3504 so that the plate-shaped object data SSD for step shadow is arranged at a position away from the staircase image SG by one pixel. Object data Coordinate data corresponding to the coordinate data of SGD.

After that, in step S3510, the texture data SST for step shadow is grasped as the data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. Further, in step S3511, the fixed UV coordinate data of the texture data SST for step shadow is grasped from the texture data SST, and in step S3512, other parameter information applied to the texture data SST is obtained in this drawing list. Grasp based on.

After that, in step S3513, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed according to the contents corresponding to the grasped results of steps S3503 to S3512.

By executing the setting process for displaying the step shadow as described above, the object data SGD for the stairs, the object data COD1 for the character, and the plate-shaped object data SSD for the step shadow are arranged in the world coordinate system, and the display CPU 131. Various parameter information including the coordinate data derived by the calculation is applied to each object data SGD, COD1, SSD. Further, the corresponding texture data SGTD, CTD1, SST is applied to each object data SGD, COD1, SSD. As a result, as shown in FIG. 72A, on the display surface P, a moving image is displayed as if the effect character CH13 is moving on the stairs of the staircase image SG, and the effect character CH13 is moved in accordance with the movement of the effect character CH13. The moving image is displayed so that the shadow image CH14 follows while deforming along the shape of the stairs.

In the configuration in which the effect character CH13 is displayed so as to move on the stairs as described above, the step shadow texture data SSD is applied to the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD formed according to the shape of the stairs. The shadow image CH14 is displayed in. This makes it possible to display the shadow image CH14 along the shape of the stairs.

The plate-shaped object data SSD for step shadows is set corresponding to the entire range in which the shadow image CH14 can be displayed on the stairs, and the base UV coordinate data of the plate-shaped object data SSD for step shadows is changed to change the shadow image CH14. By changing the display position, the data capacity required for storing the image data can be increased as compared with the configuration in which a plurality of types of plate-shaped object data for step shadows corresponding to each display position of the shadow image CH14 are prepared. It is possible to reduce it.

Instead of applying the step shadow texture data SST to the staircase object data SGD, by setting the step shadow plate-shaped object data SSD separately and applying the step shadow texture data SST, the base UV coordinate data By changing the above, it is possible to prevent the display position of the shadow image CH14 from being affected when the display position of the shadow image CH14 is changed.

<Another form of configuration related to step shadow display>
-Using the configuration that changes the display position of the image by changing the base UV coordinate data of the object data without changing the UV coordinate data of the texture, to display the planar shadow image CH12 already described. May be good. In this case, the size of the flat shadow plate-shaped object data BSD does not correspond to the entire ground object data BGD, but corresponds to a part of the range in which the shadow image CH12 can be displayed in the ground object data BGD. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity of the flat shadow plate-shaped object data BSD.

-When the UV coordinate data of the texture is changed in the display CPU 131, the texture data SST for the step shadow is applied to the object data SGD for the stairs without using the plate-shaped object data SSD for the step shadow. May be. In this case, after applying the staircase texture data SGTD to the staircase object data SGD, the step shadow texture data SST is applied so as to overwrite the position corresponding to the UV coordinate data set in the display CPU 131. According to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the data capacity in that the plate-shaped object data SSD for step shadows is not required, and the relationship with the UV coordinate data without changing the base UV coordinate data of the object data. It is possible to display the movement along the staircase shape of the shadow image CH14.

-The object data provided separately from the staircase object data SGD for displaying the shadow image CH14 is not limited to the plate-shaped object data, and is configured in a thick three-dimensional shape like the character object data COD1. It may be the object data that has been created.

-The structure for displaying the shadow image CH14 of the effect character CH13 using the object data provided separately from the staircase object data SGD, and displaying the reflection image showing how the effect character CH13 is reflected on the water surface. You may use it to do so.

<Structure for performing variable display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a variable display effect will be described. FIG. 75 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the variable display effect, and FIG. 75 (b) is for explaining the configuration of an area used when executing the variable display effect in the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134. It is explanatory drawing of.

As shown in FIG. 75A, the variable display effect is before the effect character CH15, which is recognized by the player as representing a person having a face, a torso, both hands, and both feet, is moved and displayed. This is an effect in which a plurality of symbol display units CH16 to CH18 are displayed in a variable manner. In the variable display effect, three types of the first symbol display unit CH16, the second symbol display unit CH17, and the third symbol display unit CH18 are displayed in a variable manner, but the number of symbol display units may be one and other. There may be more than one. Each of the symbol display units CH16 to CH18 has the same appearance shape, and an effect symbol is attached to each of the surfaces arranged in the circumferential direction. While the types of effect symbols arranged in the circumferential direction in one symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 are all different, the types of effect symbols set in each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 are the same.

The variable display effect is executed as a promotion effect in the open / close execution mode. The promotion effect is an effect that can occur in both the case of the normal jackpot result and the case of the 15R high accuracy jackpot result. Specifically, at the end of the effect for the game round, the symbol display device 41 displays the final stop display of the combination of even-numbered symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result, and the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is displayed. If it is a 15R high-accuracy jackpot result, a high-accuracy response effect is performed during the open / close execution mode, and if the jackpot result that triggered this open / close execution mode is a normal jackpot result, it is in the open / close execution mode. It is a production in which a low-accuracy response production is performed. The variable display effect is started during the open / close execution mode, and in the open / close execution mode triggered by the 15R high accuracy jackpot result, the same effect symbol is used when the variable display of the plurality of symbol display units CH16 to CH18 is stopped. In the open / close execution mode triggered by the normal jackpot result, the combination of the same effect symbols is not stopped and displayed when the variable display of the plurality of symbol display units CH16 to CH18 is stopped.

When the variable display effect is executed, each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 is displayed semi-transparently for at least a predetermined period. In this case, each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 is displayed as a three-dimensional image using the object data and texture data stored in advance in the memory module 133, but the object data is semi-transparent as it is. If this is applied, the image on the back side of the object data set as the three-dimensional data may be seen as it is. On the other hand, instead of performing semi-transparency processing on the object data for displaying each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18, two-dimensional drawing of each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 created separately from the effect character CH15 is performed. By applying semi-transparency processing to the data and superimposing it on the two-dimensional drawing data for displaying the effect character CH15, as shown in FIG. 75A, in front of the effect character CH15. The semi-transparent symbol display units CH16 to CH18 are displayed in a variable manner.

In order to perform the display control, the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 has a drawing buffer BF1, a first storage buffer BF2, a second storage buffer BF3, and a third storage as shown in FIG. 75 (b). A buffer BF4 for storage and a buffer BF5 for fourth storage are provided. Each of these buffers BF1 to BF5 has the same number of unit areas as the frame areas 142a and 142b of the frame buffer 142, and 1 byte is allocated to each RGB color in each unit area. Therefore, it is possible to draw drawing data similar to the drawing data drawn in the frame areas 142a and 142b in the buffers BF1 to BF5. Further, in each unit area, a 1-byte area for setting an α value is set in addition to the area of each RBG color.

The drawing buffer BF1 is used when drawing two-dimensional drawing data for displaying the effect character CH15 and two-dimensional drawing data for displaying the symbol display units CH16 to CH18. The first storage buffer BF2 is used to temporarily store the two-dimensional drawing data of the effect character CH15 created by using the drawing buffer BF1. The second storage buffer BF3 is used to temporarily store the two-dimensional drawing data of the first symbol display unit CH16 created by using the drawing buffer BF1. The third storage buffer BF4 is used to temporarily store the two-dimensional drawing data of the second symbol display unit CH17 created by using the drawing buffer BF1. The fourth storage buffer BF5 is used to temporarily store the two-dimensional drawing data of the third symbol display unit CH18 created by using the drawing buffer BF1.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the variable display effect will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process for a variable display effect executed by the display CPU 131. The calculation process for the variable display effect is executed in the effect calculation process in step S2209 in the task process (FIG. 42). The arithmetic processing for the variable display effect is started when the information about the variable display effect is set in the currently set execution target table.

When it is the start timing of the variable display effect (step S3601: YES), each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for performing the variable display effect is grasped (step S3602). The image data includes character object data and character texture data for displaying the effect character CH15, symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the first symbol display unit CH16, and a second symbol data. A symbol object data and a symbol texture data for displaying the symbol display unit CH17, and a symbol object data and a symbol texture data for displaying the third symbol display unit CH18 are included. After that, in step S3603, the start designation information of the variable display effect for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the variable display effect should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When a negative determination is made in step S3601 or the process of step S3603 is executed, in step S3604, the effect character CH15 is displayed as the data to be used this time based on the currently set execution target table. Grasp the character object data and character texture data. Then, the parameter information is calculated and derived for the character object data and the character texture data, and the derived parameter information is written in the work RAM 132 in the area secured corresponding to the image data (step S3605). In this case, the coordinate data in the world coordinate system of each pixel of the character object data is updated so that the display content is recognized as running toward the display surface P front side of the effect character CH15.

Further, in step S3606, the object data for each symbol and the texture data for each symbol for displaying each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 are grasped as the data to be used this time based on the execution target table currently set. To do. Then, the parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the symbol object data and the symbol texture data, and the derived parameter information is written in the work RAM 132 in the area secured corresponding to the image data (step S3607). ). In this case, in the world coordinate system of each pixel of each symbol object data so that the display contents are recognized as the symbols CH16 to CH18 orbiting in a predetermined direction in front of the effect character CH15. The coordinate data is updated. Further, the α value applied to the object data for each symbol during the entire period of the variable display effect is set to opaque information that does not allow the image that overlaps on the back side of the display surface P to be transmitted.

After that, in step S3608, it is determined whether or not each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 is displayed in a semi-transparent state based on the currently set execution target table. In the case of the semi-transparent period (step S3608: YES), in step S3609, the semi-transparent value data is grasped based on the currently set execution target table. Further, in step S3610, the semi-transparent designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the semi-transparent period is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When a negative determination is made in step S3608, or when the process of step S3610 is executed, in step S3611, the variable display effect designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the variable display effect is displayed on the display CPU 131. Store in the register.

When the arithmetic processing for the variable display effect is executed as described above, the character object for displaying the effect character CH15 is included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP135 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S609). Data and texture data for characters, object data for symbols and texture data for displaying the first symbol display unit CH16, object data for symbols and texture data for symbols for displaying the second symbol display unit CH17. And the information of the instruction to use the symbol object data and the symbol texture data for displaying the third symbol display unit CH18 is set. In addition, parameter information applied to each of these image data is set in the drawing list. In addition, variable display effect designation information is set in the drawing list, and variable display effect start designation information is set at the start timing of the variable display effect, and semi-transparent designation information is set during the semi-transparent period. To. Furthermore, when the semi-transparent designation information is set, the semi-transparent value data is set in the drawing list.

Next, the setting process for the variable display effect executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 77. The setting process for the variable display effect is executed as a part of the setting process for the effect executed in step S2303 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the variable display effect designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the variable display effect is executed.

When the start designation information of the variable display effect is set in the drawing list this time (step S3701: YES), the memory module 133 is the display target of this time from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The address where various image data is stored is grasped, and based on the grasped result, various image data are read out from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S3702). The image data includes character object data and character texture data for displaying the effect character CH15, symbol object data and symbol texture data for displaying the first symbol display unit CH16, and a second symbol data. A symbol object data and a symbol texture data for displaying the symbol display unit CH17, and a symbol object data and a symbol texture data for displaying the third symbol display unit CH18 are included.

When a negative determination is made in step S3701 or when the process of step S3702 is executed, in step S3703, character object data and character texture data for displaying the effect character CH15 based on the current drawing list are obtained. Grasp as the data to be displayed. Further, in step S3704, the parameter information of the image data is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, various parameter information is grasped including the coordinate data for making the display content recognized that the effect character CH15 is running toward the front side of the display surface P.

After that, in step S3705, each symbol object data and each symbol texture data for displaying each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 are grasped based on the current drawing list. Further, in step S3706, the parameter information of the image data is grasped based on the current drawing list. In this case, various parameter information is grasped including the coordinate data for displaying the display contents in which each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 is recognized as rotating in a predetermined direction in front of the effect character CH15. Further, as the α value applied to each symbol object data, opaque information that does not allow the image that overlaps on the back side of the display surface P to be transmitted is grasped.

After that, in step S3707, the setting process for the world coordinate system is executed according to the contents corresponding to the grasped results of steps S3703 to S3706. As a result, in the world coordinate system, the object data of the effect character CH15 and the first symbol have a positional relationship that enables the creation of drawing data corresponding to the image for the variable display effect as shown in FIG. 75 (a). The object data of the display unit CH16, the object data of the second symbol display unit CH17, and the object data of the third symbol display unit CH18 are set. That is, the object data of each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 is arranged in front of the object data of the effect character CH15, the object data of the first symbol display unit CH16 is arranged on the left, and the second symbol display unit is arranged in the center. The object data of CH17 is arranged, and the object data of the third symbol display unit CH18 is arranged on the right side.

Next, the drawing data creation process for the variable display effect executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78. The drawing data creation process for the variable display effect is the drawing data creation process for the effect and the design executed in step S2311 of the drawing process (FIG. 44) when the variable display effect designation information is set in the drawing list. It is executed as a part of the processing of.

In the following description, the explanatory views of FIGS. 79 (a) to 79 (c) and 80 (a) to 80 (e) will be referred to as appropriate. FIG. 79 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing data of the first symbol display unit CH16 stored in the second storage buffer BF3, and FIG. 79 (b) is stored in the third storage buffer BF4. FIG. 79 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the drawing data of the second symbol display unit CH17, and FIG. 79 (c) is for explaining the drawing data of the third symbol display unit CH18 stored in the fourth storage buffer BF5. It is explanatory drawing. Further, FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (e) are described for explaining how the drawing data of the variable display effect image is created by using the drawing data stored in the storage buffers BF2 to BF5. It is a figure.

First, in step S3801, the initialization process of the drawing buffer BF1 of the expansion buffer 141 is executed. In the initialization process, each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 is initialized. As a result, the 1-byte data corresponding to each RGB color is cleared to "0" in each unit area, and the 1-byte data corresponding to the α value in each unit area is cleared to "0" so as to be completely transparent. Will be done.

In the following step S3802, the drawing process of the effect character is executed. In the drawing process, only the object data is projected onto the screen area PC 12 by masking the object data other than the object data corresponding to the effect character CH15 in the world coordinate system. Then, the drawing data after projection is written to the drawing buffer BF1. In this case, the display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 is written in the unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 corresponding to the final display position of the effect character CH15. The α value of each unit area in which the display target data is drawn is set to the data corresponding to opacity, and the α value of each unit area in which the display target data is not drawn is maintained in the data corresponding to complete transparency. After that, in step S3803, the storage process in the first storage buffer BF2 is executed. In this case, the data state of each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 after the processing of step S3802 is stored as it is in the first storage buffer BF2.

In the following step S3804, the initialization process of the drawing buffer BF1 is executed in the same manner as in step S3801. As a result, the 1-byte data corresponding to each RGB color is cleared to "0" in each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1, and the 1-byte data corresponding to the α value corresponds to complete transparency in each unit area. "0" is cleared.

After that, in step S3805, the drawing process of the first symbol display unit is executed. In the drawing process, only the object data is projected onto the screen area PC 12 by masking the object data other than the object data corresponding to the first symbol display unit CH16 in the world coordinate system. Then, the drawing data after projection is written to the drawing buffer BF1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 79 (a-1), the display target data for displaying the first symbol display unit CH16 is the drawing buffer BF1 corresponding to the final display position of the first symbol display unit CH16. Written in the unit area. As shown in FIG. 79 (a-2), the α value of each unit area in which the display target data is drawn is set to the data corresponding to opacity, and the α value of each unit area in which the display target data is not drawn is set. It is maintained in the data corresponding to full transparency. After that, in step S3806, the storage process in the second storage buffer BF3 is executed. In this case, the data state of each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 after the processing of step S3805 is stored as it is in the second storage buffer BF3.

In the following step S3807, the initialization process of the drawing buffer BF1 is executed in the same manner as in step S3801. As a result, the 1-byte data corresponding to each RGB color is cleared to "0" in each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1, and the 1-byte data corresponding to the α value corresponds to complete transparency in each unit area. "0" is cleared.

After that, in step S3808, the drawing process of the second symbol display unit is executed. In the drawing process, only the object data is projected onto the screen area PC 12 by masking the object data other than the object data corresponding to the second symbol display unit CH17 in the world coordinate system. Then, the drawing data after projection is written to the drawing buffer BF1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 79 (b-1), the display target data for displaying the second symbol display unit CH17 is the drawing buffer BF1 corresponding to the final display position of the second symbol display unit CH17. Written in the unit area. As shown in FIG. 79 (b-2), the α value of each unit area in which the display target data is drawn is set to the data corresponding to opacity, and the α value of each unit area in which the display target data is not drawn is set. It is maintained in the data corresponding to full transparency. After that, in step S3809, the storage process in the third storage buffer BF4 is executed. In this case, the data state of each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 after the processing of step S3808 is stored as it is in the third storage buffer BF4.

In the following step S3810, the initialization process of the drawing buffer BF1 is executed in the same manner as in step S3801. As a result, the 1-byte data corresponding to each RGB color is cleared to "0" in each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1, and the 1-byte data corresponding to the α value corresponds to complete transparency in each unit area. "0" is cleared.

After that, in step S3811, the drawing process of the third symbol display unit is executed. In the drawing process, only the object data is projected onto the screen area PC 12 by masking the object data other than the object data corresponding to the third symbol display unit CH18 in the world coordinate system. Then, the drawing data after projection is written to the drawing buffer BF1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 79 (c-1), the display target data for displaying the third symbol display unit CH18 is the drawing buffer BF1 corresponding to the final display position of the third symbol display unit CH18. Written in the unit area. As shown in FIG. 79 (c-2), the α value of each unit area in which the display target data is drawn is set to the data corresponding to opacity, and the α value of each unit area in which the display target data is not drawn is set. It is maintained in the data corresponding to full transparency. After that, in step S3812, the storage process in the fourth storage buffer BF5 is executed. In this case, the data state of each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 after the processing of step S3811 is stored as it is in the fourth storage buffer BF5.

In the following step S3813, the drawing data stored in the first storage buffer BF2 is written in the effect and design buffer in the screen buffer 144. In this case, the display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 is written in the unit area of the effect and symbol buffer corresponding to the final display position of the effect character CH15. The α value of each unit area in which the display target data is drawn is set to the data corresponding to opacity, and the α value of each unit area in which the display target data is not drawn is maintained in the data corresponding to complete transparency.

After that, in step S3814, it is determined whether or not the semi-transparent designation information is set in the drawing list this time. When the semi-transparent designation information is set, the semi-transparent value data is read from the current drawing list in step S3815.

When a negative determination is made in step S3814 or when the process of step S3815 is executed, in step S3816, each drawing data stored in the second to fourth storage buffers BF3 to BF5 is produced in the screen buffer 144. And write to the buffer for the design. In this case, the display target data for displaying the symbol display units CH16 to CH18 corresponding to each drawing data is a buffer for the effect and the symbol corresponding to each display position of each final symbol display unit CH16 to CH18. Written in the unit area of.

Here, when the process of step S3815 is not executed, an opaque α value is set for the corresponding display target data in each drawing data to be written, and the data other than the corresponding display target data are completely set. A transparent α value is set. Therefore, among the display target data for displaying the already written effect character CH15, the display target data of the symbol display units CH16 to CH18 is produced for the portion that overlaps with the display target data of the symbol display units CH16 to CH18. The display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 is maintained as it is for the portion that is overwritten with the display target data of the character CH15 and does not overlap with the display target data of each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18. Further, in the display target data of the symbol display units CH16 to CH18, the display target data of the symbol display units CH16 to CH18 is added with an opaque α value for the portion that does not overlap with the display target data of the effect character CH15. Set in. In each unit area of the effect and symbol buffer, a completely transparent α value is set in the unit area where neither the display target data of the effect character CH15 nor the display target data of the symbol display units CH16 to CH18 is written. It becomes a state.

On the other hand, when the process of step S3815 is executed, a semi-transparent α value (for example, “0.5”) is set for the corresponding display target data in each drawing data to be written, and the corresponding display target data is set. A completely transparent α value is set in addition to the data to be displayed. Therefore, of the display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 that has already been written, the portion that overlaps with the display target data of each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 is the former display target data and the latter display target data. The blending process using the translucent α value is executed. For example, the color information of the former display target data in a predetermined unit area is set to "r10, g10, b10", the color information of the latter display target data is set to "r20, g20, b20", and the translucent α value is set. When set to "α20"
R: r10 × (1-α20) + r20 × α20
G: g10 × (1-α20) + g20 × α20
B: b10 × (1-α20) + b20 × α20
Will be.

In addition, among the display target data for displaying the effect character CH15 that has already been written, the portion that does not overlap with the display target data of each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 is the display target data for displaying the effect character CH15. Is maintained as it is. Further, the semi-transparent α value is added to the display target data of each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 for the portion of the display target data of each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 that does not overlap with the display target data of the effect character CH15. It is set in the state of. A completely transparent α value is set in the unit area in which neither the display target data of the effect character CH15 nor the display target data of the symbol display units CH16 to CH18 is written in each unit area of the effect and the symbol buffer. It becomes a state.

By executing the drawing data creation process, the drawing data stored in the first to fourth storage buffers BF2 to BF5 are combined as shown in FIGS. 80 (a) to 80 (d). As shown in 80 (e), the image for the variable display effect is displayed. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 80 (b) to 80 (d), display target data for displaying each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 is created from the object data in which the opaque α value is set, and the display thereof is displayed. A semi-transparent α value is set for the target data, and the effect character CH15 is superimposed on the display target data. As a result, it is possible to display the symbol display units CH16 to CH18 in a semi-transparent state while preventing the occurrence of an event that the image on the back side, which should not be displayed originally, appears as it is. It becomes.

By using the drawing buffer BF1 as a buffer for individually creating the drawing data of the effect character CH15 and the symbol display units CH16 to CH18, it is necessary to change the drawing buffer BF1 of the creation destination when creating the drawing data. Since there is no such thing, the processing design can be facilitated.

Before creating the drawing data of the effect character CH15 and the symbol display units CH16 to CH18 in the drawing buffer BF1, the α value of each unit area of the drawing buffer BF1 is set to “0” corresponding to complete transparency. Therefore, in the drawing data created in the drawing buffer BF1, the α value of the unit area other than the effect character CH15 and the unit area for displaying each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 does not require post-processing. Can be set to "0" corresponding to complete transparency.

<Another form of configuration related to variable display effect>
-The display target data of each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 is individually created for the drawing buffer BF1, and the display target data corresponding to each is stored in different storage buffers BF3 to BF5, but the configuration is limited to this. The display target data of each symbol display unit CH16 to CH18 may be collectively created in the drawing buffer BF1 and the collectively created display target data may be stored in one storage buffer. This makes it possible to reduce the number of times the drawing buffer initialization process, the display target data creation process, and the display target data storage process are executed, and the processing load can be reduced.

-The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the same translucent value data is set for the drawing data separately saved in each of the second storage buffer BF3, the third storage buffer BF4, and the fourth storage buffer BF5. The semi-transparent value data to be set may be different for each drawing data.

<Configuration for displaying a distorted background>
Next, a configuration for displaying a distorted background will be described. 81 (a) and 81 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the content of the distorted background display. 82 (a) to 82 (c) are explanatory views for explaining image data for displaying a distorted background.

The distorted background display is a background image BGG displayed so that the player can recognize that no distortion has occurred as shown in FIG. 81 (a-1). It is displayed so that the player can recognize that the image is distorted. In this case, the distortion background display is performed so that the player recognizes that the distortion occurs in two of the X-axis, the Y-axis, and the Z-axis (specifically, the X-axis and the Y-axis).

As the background image BGG, as shown in FIG. 82A, the background plate-shaped object data GSD and the background texture data GTD1 stored in advance in the memory module 133 are used. The background plate-shaped object data GSD is object data that is configured in a flat shape with no wall thickness and has a smaller number of polygons per unit display surface than a normal object having a wall thickness for displaying a character such as a person. .. Then, the background image BGG can be displayed by applying the background texture data GTD1 to the background plate-shaped object data GSD set in the world coordinate system and creating the drawing data for the background. Become.

The distorted background display is not performed by distorting the background plate-shaped object data GSD as shown in FIG. 81 (a-2) in the world coordinate system, but by adjusting the data of the background texture data GTD1. Will be done. Specifically, assuming that the background texture data GTD1 is set as the color information as shown in FIG. 81 (b-1), the predetermined columns are arranged as shown in FIG. 81 (b-2). By adjusting the color information so that the width of the color information becomes wider, the background image BGG is displayed so that the game ball recognizes that distortion has occurred as shown in FIG. 81 (a-2). Instead of distorting the background plate-shaped object data GSD, which is three-dimensional data, the distorted background is displayed by adjusting the color information of the background texture data GTD1 which is two-dimensional data. , The data to be adjusted when the distorted background display is performed can be limited to the two-dimensional data, and the processing load can be reduced.

The adjustment mode of the color information of the background texture data GTD1 for displaying the distorted background is set to the texture data provided separately from the background texture data GTD1. As the texture data, as shown in FIG. 82A, the first refraction texture data GTD2 and the second refraction texture data GTD3 are stored in advance in the memory module 133.

The number of pixels of the first refraction texture data GTD2 and the second refraction texture data GTD3 is the same as the number of pixels of the background texture data GTD1, and each pixel of each refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 and the background texture data. There is a one-to-one correspondence with each pixel of GTD1. As shown in FIG. 82 (b), each pixel of the background texture data GTD1 is set with a 1-byte area corresponding to each RGB color on a one-to-one basis, and the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 also have a figure As shown in 82 (c), a 1-byte area corresponding to each RGB color on a one-to-one basis is set. That is, although the content set for each pixel is individually different for each texture data GTD1 to GTD3, the basic data structure is the same for the background texture data GTD1 and the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3. There is.

Texture data for refraction Data corresponding to each RGB color set for each pixel of GTD2 and GTD3 (hereinafter, also referred to as R value, G value, and B value) is not used as color information but is distorted. It is used as information on the degree. Specifically, the R value is used as information on the degree of distortion on the X-axis, the G value is used as information on the degree of distortion on the Y-axis, and the B value is used as information on the degree of distortion on the Z-axis. .. However, the distortion of the background image BGG is not generated for all of the X-axis, the Y-axis, and the Z-axis, but is generated only for the two axes of the X-axis and the Y-axis as described above. Therefore, although distortion data is set for the R value and G value in each pixel of the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3, constant data is set for the B value so that all the bits are "0". Has been done.

The R value and G value of each pixel are set so that the first refraction texture data GTD2 and the second refraction texture data GTD3 differ in the adjustment mode of the color information of the background texture data GTD1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81 (a-2), the first refraction texture data GTD2 is such that the central side in the lateral direction is recessed rearward and both the left and right sides are bulged forward in the background image BGG. In the background image BGG, the center side in the horizontal direction bulges forward and the left and right sides of the second refraction texture data GTD3 bulge forward while the adjustment mode of the color information is set so that the color information can be recognized. The adjustment mode of the color information is set so that the player can recognize that the image is dented. With this configuration, the background image BGG is constant by alternately switching between the first refraction texture data GTD2 and the second refraction texture data GTD3 as the refraction texture data to be applied to the background texture data GTD1. It is possible to make a display that makes the player recognize that the pattern is wavy back and forth.

Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for displaying the distorted background will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an arithmetic process for displaying a distorted background executed by the display CPU 131. The arithmetic processing for displaying the distorted background is executed in the background arithmetic processing in step S2206 in the task processing (FIG. 42). The arithmetic processing for the distorted background display is started when the information about the distorted background display is set in the currently set execution target table.

When it is the start timing of the distorted background display (step S3901: YES), each address in the memory module 133 of the image data for performing the distorted background display is grasped (step S3902). The image data includes background plate-shaped object data GSD, background texture data GTD1, first refraction texture data GTD2, and second refraction texture data GTD3. After that, in step S3903, the start designation information of the distortion background display for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that the distortion background display should be started is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When a negative determination is made in step S3901 or the process of step S3903 is executed, a background plate-shaped object is used as the data to be used this time based on the execution target table currently set in step S3904 and step S3905. Grasp the data GSD and the background texture data GTD1. Then, the parameter information is calculated and derived for the background plate-shaped object data GSD and the background texture data GTD1, and the derived parameter information is obtained in the work RAM 132 in the area secured corresponding to the image data GSD and GTD1. (Step S3906). In this case, the shape data (that is, the relative positions of the pixels) in the world coordinate system of the background plate-shaped object data GSD is fixed during the period when the distorted background is displayed.

After that, in step S3907, it is determined whether or not the current update timing is the first distortion display period based on the currently set execution target table. The first distortion display period is a period in which the first refraction texture data GTD2 is used as the refraction texture data, and the second distortion display period is a period in which the second refraction texture data GTD3 is used as the refraction texture data. In the case of the first distortion display period (step S3907: YES), the first refraction texture data GTD2 is grasped in step S3908, and in the case of the second distortion display period (step S3907: NO), the first in step S3909. 2 Grasp the texture data GTD3 for refraction. When the process of step S3908 or step S3909 is executed, in step S3910, the distortion background display designation information for causing the VDP 135 to recognize that it is the execution period of the distortion background display is stored in the register of the display CPU 131.

When the arithmetic processing for displaying the distorted background is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 135 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S609) includes the background plate-shaped object data GSD and the background texture data. The information of the usage instruction of GTD1 is set, and the information of the usage instruction of the side of the first refraction texture data GTD2 and the second refraction texture data GTD3 that is the target of this use is set. In addition, parameter information applied to each of these image data is set in the drawing list. Further, the distortion background display designation information is set in the drawing list, and the distortion background display start designation information is set at the start timing of the distortion background display.

Next, the setting process for the distortion background display executed by the VDP 135 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 84. The setting process for displaying the distorted background is executed as a part of the setting process for the background executed in step S2302 of the drawing process (FIG. 44). Further, when the distorted background display designation information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for distorted background display is executed.

When the distortion background display start designation information is set in the drawing list this time (step S4001: YES), the memory module 133 is the display target of this time from the information of the address set in the drawing list. The address of the area where various image data is stored is grasped, and based on the grasped result, various image data are read out from the memory module 133 to the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S4002). The image data includes background plate-shaped object data GSD, background texture data GTD1, first refraction texture data GTD2, and second refraction texture data GTD3.

When a negative determination is made in step S4001, or when the process of step S4002 is executed, the background plate-shaped object data GTD1 and the background texture data GTD1 are displayed in steps S4003 and S4004 based on the current drawing list. Grasp as data of. Further, in step S4005, the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 corresponding to the current distortion display period are grasped as the data to be displayed based on the current drawing list. After that, in step S4006, the parameter information of the various image data is grasped.

In the following step S4007, a refraction application process for applying the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3, which are the objects to be used this time, to the background texture data GTD1 is executed.

In the refraction application process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 85, first, the background texture data GTD1 is separately stored in the background separate storage area 141a provided in the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 (step S4101). As a result, in a situation where the background texture data GTD1 has already been read into the expansion buffer GTD1, the same data as the background texture data GTD1 is stored and held in the background separate storage area 141a. In the following description, the background texture data GTD1 read from the memory module 133 into the expansion buffer 141 of the VRAM 134 is referred to as the background texture data GTD1 to be drawn, and the background written in the background storage area 141a. Texture data GTD1 is referred to as background texture data GTD1 to be separately saved. After that, in step S4102, the same number as the total number of pixels of the background texture data GTD1 is set in the application counter provided in the register 153 of the VDP135.

In the following step S4103, the R value and the G value are extracted from one pixel corresponding to the current application counter in the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 used this time. Then, in step S4104, a refraction calculation process using the extracted R value and G value is executed.

In the refraction calculation process, when the pixel corresponding to the current application counter value in the background texture data GTD1 is set as the reference pixel, the number of consecutive pixels from the reference pixel is determined as the execution target of the blending process. The data to be added and the data for determining the weighting of each pixel to be blended to be executed in relation to the distance from the reference pixel are extracted in step S4103. It is calculated from a predetermined calculation formula using the value and the G value. In this case, the pixels to be executed for the blending process are limited to the pixels aligned on one axis (specifically, the X-axis in FIG. 81 (a)) with respect to the reference pixel, and are on the other one axis (specifically). Does not include pixels aligned with the Z axis in FIG. 81 (a). The refraction calculation process is performed by the refraction calculation unit 154 provided as a dedicated circuit in the VDP 135. Further, as already explained, the R value is used as information on the degree of distortion on the X-axis and the G value is used as information on the degree of distortion on the Y-axis, and each of the R value and the G value is 1-byte data. Since it is a quantity, it can take a value of 0 to 255. The refraction calculation unit 154 derives the target pixel data for specifying the pixels to be included as the execution target of the blending process based on the G value corresponding to the information on the degree of distortion on the Y-axis, and the information on the degree of distortion on the X-axis. Based on the R value corresponding to, the weighting data for specifying the weighting of the blending process in relation to the distance from the reference pixel is derived.

After the refraction calculation process is executed in step S4104, the pixel color information corresponding to the calculation result of the refraction calculation process in step S4104 is stored separately by using the target pixel data in step S4105. Is extracted from the background texture data GTD1. Then, the blend values corresponding to the weighted data are integrated with the color information of each of the pixels, and the sum of the integrated values is calculated (step S4106). In this case, the blending process is performed individually for each RGB color of each pixel. After that, each of the RGB values calculated in step S4106 is overwritten with the pixels corresponding to the values of the current application counter in the background texture data GTD1 to be drawn. As a result, the color information adjustment processing corresponding to the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 to be used is executed for the pixels of the background texture data GTD1 to be drawn corresponding to the value of the current application counter.

After that, in step S4108, the value of the application counter of the register 153 is subtracted by 1, and it is determined whether or not the value of the application counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S4109). When the value of the application counter is 1 or more (step S4109: NO), the processes of steps S4103 to S4107 are executed for the pixels corresponding to the updated value of the application counter.

Returning to the description of the setting process for the distortion background display, after executing the refraction application process in step S4007, in step S4008, the setting process for the world coordinate system according to the contents corresponding to the processing results of steps S4003 to S4007. To execute.

By executing the setting process for distorted background display as described above, the background plate-shaped object data GSD is arranged in the world coordinate system, and various parameter information derived by calculation in the display CPU 131 is used for the background. It is applied to the plate-shaped object data GSD. Further, the background texture data GTD1 after the color information adjustment processing is executed using the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3, which are the objects to be used this time, is applied to the background plate-shaped object data GSD. .. As a result, the background image BGG is displayed on the display surface P so that the player can recognize that the X-axis and the Y-axis are distorted.

Since the data for applying the refraction is provided as the texture data as described above, it is possible to generate the refraction effect on the image by using the data structure of the texture data as it is. In this case, it is not necessary to store the data having a dedicated data structure for causing refraction in the memory module 133, and the data for applying refraction is handled in the same manner as when reading other texture data. It can be read from the memory module 133. For example, when the data structure is dedicated to cause refraction, the processing content for expanding the data in the expansion buffer 141 is different from the texture data, but for applying refraction. Since the data is provided as texture data, it is possible to make the processing content for the development the same as in the case of normal texture data. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

In a configuration in which data corresponding to each RGB color is set for the texture data, the refraction calculation unit 154 does not use all the data but uses only the R value and the G value as a part of the data for the background. Texture data GTD1 color information adjustment processing is executed. As a result, the processing can be simplified as compared with the configuration using each RGB data, and the time required for the color information adjustment processing of the background texture data GTD1 can be shortened.

Instead of distorting the background plate-shaped object data GSD, which is three-dimensional data, the distortion background is displayed by adjusting the color information of the background texture data GTD1 which is two-dimensional data. It is possible to limit the data to be adjusted when displaying the background to two-dimensional data, and it is possible to reduce the processing load.

<Another form of configuration related to distorted background display>
-Instead of adjusting the color information of the background texture data GTD1 by using the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3, the background plate-shaped object data GSD pixels are used by the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3. The background plate-shaped object data GSD may be distorted by adjusting the coordinate data, and as a result, the distorted background may be displayed.

-A period during which the background texture data GTD1 is drawn as it is without applying the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 instead of the configuration in which the refraction texture data GTD2 and GTD3 are always applied to the background texture data GTD1. May be set before or after the distortion background display period. In this case, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the background image BGG is distorted.

-Instead of the configuration in which the parameter information for refracting the image is derived by using two values of the R value, G value and B value of the texture data, one value or all the values are used. The configuration may be such that the parameter information is derived.

-Instead of the configuration in which the parameter information for refracting the image is derived using the texture data, another parameter information such as the transparency value of the image may be derived using the texture data.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. By the way, the following configurations of another embodiment may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations of the above embodiments.

(1) When the sound-light side MPU 62 instructs the display CPU 72 to execute the effect, the operation content of the second stage is instructed by a command consisting of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3. However, there may be a configuration in which the presence / absence of execution of the second stage effect is instructed, and there is a case where the effect content is instructed and a case in which the presence / absence of execution of the second stage effect is instructed. May be good.

(2) One command consisting of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 is transmitted corresponding to each of the contents of a plurality of types of the second stage included in the one production. Instead of the configuration, one command including the command data corresponding to each of the contents of the second stage of a plurality of types included in the one effect may be transmitted. Specifically, a command including one command data corresponding to the effect content of the first stage and each command data corresponding to the content of each second stage may be transmitted. Even in this case, it is preferable that the contents of each second stage are distinguished in byte units.

(3) One command consisting of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 is transmitted corresponding to each of the contents of the second stage of a plurality of types included in the one effect. In the configuration, if the first command data CD1 of each command transmitted before the end command is transmitted does not match, the display CPU 72 requests the sound and light side MPU 62 to retransmit the command, and the re-request is made. In this case, the same command may be transmitted again from the sound / light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72. As a result, even if the command is rewritten due to electrical noise, the command can be retransmitted to accurately execute the effect and the notification.

(4) One command consisting of the first command data CD1, the second command data CD2, and the third command data CD3 is transmitted corresponding to each of the contents of a plurality of types of the second stage included in the one effect. In the configuration, the start command may be transmitted before a plurality of types of commands corresponding to one effect are transmitted. This makes it possible for the display CPU 72 to clearly grasp whether or not a command corresponding to one effect is being transmitted.

(5) V interrupt processing (FIG. 15) even during execution of the background arithmetic processing of step S906, the effect arithmetic processing of step S909, and the symbol arithmetic processing of step S912 included in the task processing (FIG. 19). It may be configured so that a new processing time of can be started. In this case, the task processing may be restarted from the middle of the interrupted arithmetic processing in the next processing round of the V interrupt processing, or the task processing may be restarted from the beginning of the interrupted arithmetic processing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to start a new processing time of V interrupt processing at an early stage.

(6) When the execution target table for notification is read as the execution target in the display CPU 72, a new processing cycle of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 15) is started during the execution of the task processing (FIG. 19). Even if this is the case, the task processing may be executed by using the information corresponding to the new pointer information in the execution target table instead of restarting the processing from the middle of the interruption in the next execution time of the task processing. This makes it possible to prioritize the progress of the content of the notification.

(7) When a new processing round of V interrupt processing (FIG. 15) is started during the execution of the task processing (FIG. 19) and the processing is restarted from the middle of the interruption in the next execution round of the task processing. By transmitting a delay command from the display CPU 72 to the sound light side MPU 62, the pointer information of the control pattern table is adjusted in the sound light side MPU 62, but the adjustment may not be performed.

(8) In the second embodiment, the camera (viewpoint) is set individually for each image data arranged in the world coordinate system, but instead of this, all the cameras (viewpoints) are arranged in the world coordinate system. A single camera may be set in common for the image data.

(9) In the second embodiment, the image data arranged in the world coordinate system is projected in units of a background image, an effect image, and a pattern image, but is summarized in units of a background image and an effect image. It may be a configuration in which the images are projected together, a configuration in which the effect image and a pattern image are projected together, or a configuration in which all of them are projected together.

(10) In the second embodiment, when the color information setting process (step S2309) is performed, the color information may be set such that the texture is pasted only on the projected surface. In this case, the rendering processing load can be reduced. Further, instead of setting the color information such as texture mapping before projection, the configuration may be such that the color information such as texture mapping is set after projection. In this case, at the time of projection, the coordinate information of each pixel constituting the projection plane may be stored, and the color information such as texture mapping may be set based on the coordinate information.

(11) Display control based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50 instead of the configuration in which the display control device 90 is controlled by the voice emission control device 60 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50. The device 90 may be configured to control the voice emission control device 60. Further, instead of the configuration in which the voice emission control device 60 and the display control device 90 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and the function of one of the two control devices may be provided. May be integrated in the main control device 50, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 50. Further, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 50 to the voice emission control device 60 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 60 to the display control device 90 are also arbitrary.

(12) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-bullet type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Features A1. A display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P) and
Display control means (VDP135) for displaying an image on the display unit using the generated data (drawing data) generated by the data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152).
With
The data generation means includes information derivation means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2807 to S2815 in the display CPU 131) for deriving the control information (coordinate data) used to generate the generated data.
The information derivation means is
Pre-derivation setting means (function of executing the processes of steps S2808 and S2809 in the display CPU 131) for setting the derivation storage means (coordinate calculation area 169) to the pre-derivation state, and
It is provided with a derivation execution means (a function of executing the process of step S2810 in the display CPU 131) for deriving the control information by using the derivation storage means set in the pre-derivation state.
The setting to the pre-derivation state by the pre-derivation setting means is a configuration that can be executed a plurality of times to generate the generated data at the update timing of one image.
The derivation execution means includes a plurality of types of individual images (aggregate unit character CHG1) after the pre-derivation state is set by the pre-derivation setting means and before the pre-derivation state is newly set. It is characterized by having a plurality of corresponding derivation means (a function of executing the process of step S2810 of the display CPU 131 when deriving the coordinate data for the aggregate skeleton data FRD2) for deriving the control information corresponding to (CHG5). A game machine to be.

According to the feature A1, by generating the generated data for image display using the control information, it is possible to change the content of the generated data by changing the control information, and the display mode of the image is diversified. It becomes possible to do. Further, when the control information is derived, the control information can be preferably derived by using the derivation storage means and starting the derivation of the control information after setting the derivation storage means in the pre-derivation state. It will be possible.

In this case, control information corresponding to a plurality of types of individual images is derived after the pre-derivation state is set for the derivation storage means and before the pre-derivation state is newly set. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for deriving the control information as compared with the configuration in which the state before derivation is set for each individual image. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform display control.

Feature A2. After initializing the derivation storage means, the derivation setting means sets the derivation information about the individual image to be derived of the control information in the derivation storage means after the initialization, thereby deriving the control information. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the storage means is set to the state before derivation.

According to the feature A2, when the control information is derived, the control information can be appropriately derived by initializing the derivation storage means and setting the pre-derivation information. In this case, since the control information is derived for a plurality of types of individual images after the setting of the pre-derivating state is performed and before the setting of the pre-deriving state is newly performed, the derivation storage means. It is possible to reduce the number of times of initialization and setting of pre-derivation information, and it is possible to reduce the processing load for deriving control information.

Feature A3. The data generation means uses one image data (aggregate skeleton data FRD2) in order to display the plurality of types of individual images to which the control information is collectively derived by the plurality of correspondence derivation means. The gaming machine according to the feature A1 or A2.

According to the feature A3, since the configuration is such that a plurality of types of individual images are displayed by one image data, the control information derived collectively is applied to the one image data instead of being applied to the plurality of image data. Just do it. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the process for specifying the image data to which the control information is applied.

Feature A4. When the data generation means creates the generated data for displaying the image in which the individual image operates, the data is set in correspondence with the individual image and is the reference data (skeleton data FRD1) which is the reference of the movement. , Aggregation skeleton data FRD2), deformation data deformed according to the reference data (skin data SKD1, aggregate skin data SKD2), and color data (texture data BTD1) in which color information applied to the transformation data is defined. , Texture data for aggregation BTD2) can be used.
Each of the plurality of types of individual images to which the control information is collectively derived by the plurality of correspondence derivation means is an image that can be displayed by using the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data. Yes,
Any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that the content of the reference data corresponding to the plurality of types of individual images is changed by the control information so that the operation mode of the plurality of types of individual images is changed. The game machine described in.

According to the feature A4, since the video display of a plurality of types of individual images is performed using the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data, it is possible to realistically represent the video display of the plurality of types of individual images. It becomes. In this case, since the control information for changing the content of the reference data is collectively derived for a plurality of types of individual images, the processing load is extremely heavy even if the configuration uses the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data. It is possible to prevent it from becoming too high.

Feature A5. The data generation means is configured to use the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data when creating generation data for displaying an image in which a specific individual image (bone display character CH10) operates. ,
The feature A4 is characterized in that the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying the plurality of types of individual images is equal to or less than the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying the specific individual image. The game machine described.

According to the feature A5, even when a plurality of types of individual images are displayed at the same time using the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data, the total data of the reference data for displaying the plurality of types of individual images. Since the capacity is less than or equal to the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying a specific individual image, it is possible to suppress the amount of data that is the target for the derivation of control information and the application of the derived control information. It is possible to reduce the load.

Feature A6. The reference data has a plurality of unit reference data (bone data BOD1 to BOD50, ABD1 to ABD50), and individual corresponding to the reference data by changing the relative positional relationship of the plurality of unit reference data. It is a configuration in which the operation mode of the image is changed.
The data relations of the plurality of unit reference data are set so that when the position data of the main unit reference data is changed, the position data of the sub unit reference data is changed accordingly.
Among the plurality of types of individual images, the unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual image is set in the relationship of the sub unit reference data with respect to the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image. The gaming machine described in A5.

According to the feature A6, when the position data of the main unit reference data is changed, the position data of the sub unit reference data is changed, so that the operation mode of one individual image is determined by one reference data. In, it is possible to express the operation mode of the individual image more realistically. In this case, the unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual image among the plurality of types of individual images is set in the relationship of the sub unit reference data with respect to the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image. As a result, when moving the main individual image and the sub individual image together, the position data of the main unit reference data can be used by using the data relationship between the main unit reference data and the sub unit reference data in the reference data. It suffices to adjust the control information to change.

Feature A7. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the position data of the sub unit reference data can be changed without affecting the position data of the main unit reference data.

According to the feature A7, even if the data relationship between the main unit reference data and the sub unit reference data is set in the main individual image and the sub individual image, the sub individual image is displayed regardless of the main individual image. It becomes possible to operate.

Feature A8. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image and the unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual image, and the unit reference data of the main individual image is the main between the corresponding unit reference data. The gaming machine according to feature A6 or A7, wherein the data relationship is set so that the unit reference data of the sub-individual image becomes the unit reference data and becomes the sub unit reference data.

According to the feature A8, the association between the main individual image and the sub individual image can be performed in detail in the unit of the unit reference data.

Feature A9. The main individual image and the sub individual image have the same or substantially the same number and arrangement of unit reference data.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A8, wherein at least one of the deformation data and the color data is shared between the main individual image and the sub individual image.

According to the feature A9, since at least one of the deformation data and the color data is shared by the main individual image and the sub individual image, it is possible to suppress the data capacity required for storing various data.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A9, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J2, Features K1 to K6, and Features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. A display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P) and
Display control means (VDP135) for displaying an image on the display unit using the generated data (drawing data) generated by the data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152).
With
When the data generation means creates the generated data for displaying the image in which the individual image operates, the data is set in correspondence with the individual image and serves as a reference for the movement (aggregate skeleton). Data FRD2), deformation data deformed according to the reference data (aggregation skin data SKD2), and color data in which color information applied to the transformation data is defined (aggregation texture data BTD2) can be used. It is a possible configuration,
The reference data has a plurality of unit reference data (bone data ABD1 to ABD50), and the operation mode of the individual image corresponding to the reference data is changed by changing the relative positional relationship of the plurality of unit reference data. Is a configuration that changes
The data relations of the plurality of unit reference data are set so that when the position data of the main unit reference data is changed, the position data of the sub unit reference data is changed accordingly.
Of the plurality of types of individual images, the unit reference data corresponding to the sub-individual images (second to fifth set unit characters CHG2 to CHG5) is the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image (first set unit character CHG1). A gaming machine characterized in that it is set in relation to the sub-unit reference data.

According to the feature B1, when the position data of the main unit reference data is changed, the position data of the sub unit reference data is changed, so that the operation mode of one individual image is determined by one reference data. In, it is possible to express the operation mode of the individual image more realistically. In this case, the unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual image among the plurality of types of individual images is set in the relationship of the sub unit reference data with respect to the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image. As a result, when moving the main individual image and the sub individual image together, the position data of the main unit reference data can be used by using the data relationship between the main unit reference data and the sub unit reference data in the reference data. It suffices to adjust the control information to change.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the position data of the sub-unit reference data can be changed without affecting the position data of the main unit reference data.

According to the feature B2, even if the data relationship between the main unit reference data and the sub unit reference data is set in the main individual image and the sub individual image, the sub individual image is displayed regardless of the main individual image. It becomes possible to operate.

Feature B3. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the unit reference data corresponding to the main individual image and the unit reference data corresponding to the sub individual image, and the unit reference data of the main individual image is the main between the corresponding unit reference data. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the data relationship is set so that the unit reference data of the sub-individual image becomes the unit reference data and becomes the sub unit reference data.

According to the feature B3, the association between the main individual image and the sub individual image can be performed in detail in the unit of the unit reference data.

Feature B4. The main individual image and the sub individual image have the same or substantially the same number and arrangement of unit reference data.
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein at least one of the deformation data and the color data is shared between the main individual image and the sub individual image.

According to the feature B4, since at least one of the deformation data and the color data is shared by the main individual image and the sub individual image, it is possible to suppress the data capacity required for storing various data.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the unit reference data corresponding to each of the plurality of types of individual images is included in one reference data.

According to the feature B5, since the unit reference data corresponding to each of the plurality of types of individual images is aggregated into one reference data, the processing load is reduced for the process for reading the reference data and the process for using the reference data. It becomes possible to do.

Feature B6. The data generation means is configured to use the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data when creating generation data for displaying an image in which a specific individual image (bone display character CH10) operates. ,
Features B1 to characterized in that the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying the plurality of types of individual images is equal to or less than the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying the specific individual image. The gaming machine according to any one of B5.

According to the feature B6, even when a plurality of types of individual images are displayed at the same time using the reference data, the deformation data, and the color data, the total data of the reference data for displaying the plurality of types of individual images. Since the capacity is less than or equal to the total data capacity of the reference data for displaying a specific individual image, the amount of data targeted for deriving the information for controlling the reference data and applying the derived information is suppressed. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features B1 to B6, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J2, Features K1 to K6, and Features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. An arrangement means for arranging object data which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of steps S2302 to S2304 in VDP135) and a viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (VDP135). The object data is projected onto the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the generated data (drawing data) is generated based on the data projected on the projection plane. Generated data that stores the generated data generated by the data generating means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152) having a drawing setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S231 to S2312 in the VDP 135). Storage means (frame buffer 142) and
A display control means (VDP135) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means on the display means (design display device 41), and
In a game machine equipped with
The arrangement means uses either a shadow image or a reflection image of the first individual image (effect characters CH11, CH13) as a corresponding image (shadow image CH12, CH14) as a second individual image (ground image BG, staircase image). When displaying so as to overlap a part of SG), the corresponding object data (plate-shaped object data BSD for plane shadow, plate-shaped object data SSD for step shadow) which is the object data for displaying the corresponding image. The gaming machine is characterized in that is arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space separately from the object data (ground object data BGD, staircase object data SGD) for displaying the second individual image.

According to the feature C1, the second individual image is displayed because the corresponding object data, which is the object data for displaying the corresponding image, is set separately from the object data for displaying the second individual image. It is possible to set the data for displaying the corresponding image independently of the data setting of. As a result, even when the corresponding image, which is either the shadow image or the reflected image of the first individual image, is displayed so as to overlap a part of the second individual image, the display content of the corresponding image is displayed. It is possible to set data for displaying the second individual image regardless of the above, and the design for displaying these images can be facilitated. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform display control.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the corresponding object data is a plate-shaped polygon.

According to the feature C2, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while suppressing the increase in the data capacity required for storing the object data.

Feature C3. The arrangement means is described in feature C1 or C2, wherein the corresponding object data is arranged so as to be separated from the object data for displaying the second individual image on the side where the display position is in front. Game machine.

According to the feature C3, in the virtual three-dimensional space, the corresponding object data is not arranged so as to overlap the object data for displaying the second individual image, but is arranged so as to be separated from the display position on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to superimpose the corresponding image on the second individual image while using the configuration in which the image to be displayed is determined in relation to the arrangement position in the virtual three-dimensional space.

Feature C4. When the data generation means changes the position of the object data for displaying the first individual image in the virtual three-dimensional space, the data generation means changes the position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space accordingly. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, which comprises (a function of executing the processes of steps S3112 and S3313 in the display CPU 131).

According to the feature C4, it is possible to move and display the corresponding image by following the moving display of the first individual image only by changing the display position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space.

Feature C5. The data generation means includes a texture setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2309 in VDP135) for setting texture data for the object data.
When the display mode of the first individual image is the first display mode, the texture setting means uses the first corresponding texture data (texture data BST1 for first plane shadow) as the texture data for displaying the corresponding image. When the corresponding object data is set and the display mode of the second individual image is the second display mode, the second corresponding texture data (texture data for second plane shadow BST2) is used as the texture data for displaying the corresponding image. ) Is set in the corresponding object data. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4.

According to the feature C5, it is possible to match the display mode of the corresponding image with the display mode of the first individual image only by switching the texture data set in the corresponding object data.

Feature C6. When the display mode of the first individual image is the first display mode, the data generation means uses the first shape data as shape data for determining the shape of the corresponding object data, and displays the first individual image. When the mode is the second display mode, it is provided with means for using the second shape data as the shape data for determining the shape of the corresponding object data (a function of executing the processes of steps S3309 to S3311 in the display CPU 131). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5.

According to the feature C6, by changing the shape data used for the corresponding object data, it is possible to match the display mode of the corresponding image with the display mode of the first individual image.

Feature C7. The data generation means includes a texture setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2309 in VDP135) for setting texture data for the object data.
When the display position of the first individual image is changed, the texture setting means corresponds to the texture data for displaying the corresponding image in a situation where the position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space is not changed. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized in that it includes a setting position changing means (a function of executing the process of step S3410 in the display CPU 131) for changing the setting position relationship with respect to the object data.

According to the feature C7, the position of the corresponding object data in the virtual three-dimensional space is changed by making the corresponding image follow the moving display of the first individual image by changing the setting positional relationship of the texture data with respect to the corresponding object data. Even in an unfavorable situation, it is possible to move and display the corresponding image.

Feature C8. The shape data of the corresponding object data is set in correspondence with the shape data of the object data for displaying the second individual image corresponding to the area in which the corresponding image is superimposed and displayed in the second individual image. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature C8, since the corresponding object data is set corresponding to the shape of the object data for displaying the second individual image, even if the corresponding object data is used to display the corresponding image. It is possible to preferably superimpose the corresponding image on the second individual image.

Further, by applying the configuration limited to the feature C7 in the configuration of the feature C8, the movement display of the corresponding image is performed by changing the setting positional relationship of the texture data with respect to the corresponding object data, and the second individual image It is possible to move and display the corresponding image without complicatedly moving the corresponding object data set corresponding to the shape of the object data for displaying the image in the virtual three-dimensional space.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features C1 to C8, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J2, Features K1 to K6, and Features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P) and
A display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance, and
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) for displaying an image on the display unit using image data stored in the display storage means, and
With
The display storage means stores compressed moving image data (base moving image data BMD) used for reproducing moving images.
The display control means
The expansion means (processing of step S1303 in VDP76) that expands the moving image data into the expanding area (expanding buffer 81) and creates still image data for a plurality of update timings for the image corresponding to the moving image data. Function to execute, video decoder 93) and
By using the still image data for a plurality of update timings developed by the developing means in the order specified in the moving image data, a moving image corresponding to the moving image data (character CH1 for color change effect). ) Is displayed (a function of executing the process of step S1206 in the display CPU 72, a function of executing the process of step S1306 in the VDP 76), and
When the additional image data (first to nth parts image data PD1 to PD3) is read from the display storage means and the still image data is used, the additional image data is used to correspond to the additional image data. Additional execution means for adding an additional individual image (color change target area CR) to the moving image compatible image (a function of executing the process of step S1206 in the display CPU 72, a function of executing the process of step S1307 in the VDP 76), and
A game machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature D1, when displaying an image at one update timing, not only the still image data obtained by expanding the moving image data is used, but also the additional image data is used to support moving images. It is a configuration in which an additional individual image is additionally displayed with respect to the image. As a result, even if it becomes necessary to change a part of the moving image compatible image, for example, the moving image data can be used as it is by using the additional image data to correspond to the partial change. It will be possible. Further, for example, even when a plurality of types of moving images having different contents of a part of a moving image compatible image are required, the moving image data can be obtained by using additional image data to make some of the contents different. There is no need to prepare multiple types. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform display control.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, which has a configuration in which different additional image data can be used at a plurality of update timings so that the additional individual image can be changed at a plurality of update timings.

According to the feature D2, since different additional image data can be used at a plurality of update timings, it is possible to change the content of the additional individual image according to the content of the moving image compatible image.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the additional image data corresponding to each of the plurality of update timing still image data can be used.

According to the feature D3, it is possible to display an additional individual image according to the content of the moving image-compatible image over the entire display period of the moving image-compatible image.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to feature D2 or D3, wherein the additional image data for a plurality of update timings is stored in advance in the display storage means without being compressed as moving image data.

According to the feature D4, since the additional image data is stored as the moving image data without being compressed, the expansion processing of a plurality of types of moving image data can be performed at the same time when the additional individual image is additionally displayed on the moving image compatible image. There is no need to do it.

Feature D5. The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein data having a transparency value corresponding to translucency or transparency is set in the additional image data.

According to the feature D5, since the transparent value data corresponding to translucency or transparency is set in the additional image data, it is possible to perform the display using the transparent value when the additional individual image is additionally displayed. For example, it is possible to display an effect image as an additional individual image, and it is also possible to display an image in which a predetermined portion is transparent or translucent as an additional individual image. Further, the image quality of the additional individual image is improved by storing the additional image data having the configuration of the above feature D4 and having the transparency value data corresponding to translucency or transparency set as the moving image data without being compressed. It is possible to prevent it from deteriorating.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the additional individual image corresponds to a part of an image portion of the moving image compatible image.

According to the feature D6, it is possible to change the content of a part of the image portion of the moving image compatible image by using the additional individual image.

Feature D7. The display control means executes the color information changing means for changing the color information applied to the additional image data (the function of executing the process of step S1204 in the display CPU 72, the processes of step S1305 and steps S1403 to S1406 in VDP76). The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, which is characterized by having a function).

According to the feature D7, since the color information applied to the additional image data is changed, the image data is stored as compared with the configuration in which the additional image data is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of types of color information. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the data.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features D1 to D7, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J2, Features K1 to K6, and Features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P) and
A display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance, and
By setting the image data in the setting storage means (frame buffer 82) having a plurality of unit setting areas (unit area 121), drawing data is created in the setting storage means, and an image signal corresponding to the drawing data is created. A display control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) for displaying an image on the display unit based on outputting the image to the display means.
With
The display control means
When displaying a plurality of individual images (effect effect character CH2, effect image EG2) so as to overlap in the depth direction of the display unit, the unit in which the plurality of individual images overlap in the depth direction of the display unit. Regarding the data in the setting area, the back side image data which is the image data of the overlapping part of the back side individual image (effect effect effect character CH2) is the image data of the overlapping part of the front side individual image (effect image EG2). Duplicate reflection means (a function of executing the processes of step S1701, step S1709, and step S1710 in VDP76) so that the data is reflected.
When the back side image data is reflected on the front side image data by the duplicate reflection means, the reflection reduction means (in VDP76) for reducing the reflection ratio of at least one of the front side image data and the back side image data. (Function to execute the process of step S1705 to step S1708) and
With
When the reflection reducing means reduces the reflection ratio of one of the front side image data and the back side image data to be reduced, the reduction amount of one of the front side image data and the back side image data. A gaming machine characterized in that the amount of reduction of the reflection ratio varies depending on the content of the reference image data.

According to the feature E1, the front side image data and the back side image data are duplicated and reflected in a state where the ratio of reflecting the reduction target image data is reduced. As a result, for example, when the front side image data and the back side image data are duplicated and reflected as they are, the image cannot be displayed well, the reflection ratio of at least one of the image data is reduced, and the duplicated reflection is performed. It is possible to perform good display.

In this case, the reduction amount of the reflection ratio of the reduction target image data is different depending on the content of the reduction amount reference image data. This makes it possible to reduce the reduction target image data in a manner according to the content of the reduction amount reference image data, as compared with the configuration in which the reflection ratio of the reduction target image data is uniformly reduced, and the duplicate reflection of the image data can be achieved. When doing so, it is possible to make fine adjustments to further enhance the display effect.

From the above, it is possible to preferably perform display control.

Specifically, as the configuration of the duplicate reflection means, "the image data has a plurality of unit image data (pixels 122) associated with numerical information defining color information, and the duplicate reflection means. Is an arithmetic processing execution means for executing a predetermined arithmetic processing using the numerical information of each unit image data overlapping with each other in the plurality of individual images, and storing the arithmetic result data of the arithmetic processing for setting. The means includes a setting processing execution means for setting in the unit setting area corresponding to the unit image data overlapping with each other. ”A more specific configuration is that“ the unit setting area is , Numerical information can be set within the range up to the limit value, and the display control means displays brighter colors at dots corresponding to the unit setting area as a larger numerical value is set as the numerical information. The image signal is output as described above, and the arithmetic processing execution means adds numerical information of each unit image data overlapping with each other in the plurality of individual images as the predetermined arithmetic processing. Is executed. "

Feature E2. The image data has a plurality of unit image data (pixels 122) associated with numerical information that defines color information.
The unit setting area has a configuration in which numerical information can be set within a range up to the limit value.
The display control means is configured to output the image signal so that the larger the numerical value is set as the numerical information, the brighter the color is displayed at the dots of the display unit corresponding to the unit setting area.
In the reflection reduction means, the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the unit image data of the reduction amount reference image data having a relatively large numerical information has a relatively small numerical information. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the reduction amount of the reflection ratio is made larger than the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the unit image data of the quantity reference image data.

According to the feature E2, since the dot corresponding to the unit setting area in which the numerical information of a large numerical value is set is displayed in a brighter color, the complexity of the display control of the dot can be suppressed. In this case, the unit image of the reduction target image data corresponding to the unit image data of the reduction amount reference image data having a relatively large numerical information has a relatively small numerical information of the unit image of the reduction amount reference image data. The amount of reduction in the reflection ratio is larger than the unit image data of the image data to be reduced corresponding to the data. As a result, the reduction amount of the reflection ratio is increased by giving priority to not reaching the limit value for the part where the limit value of the unit setting area may be reached when the image data of each individual image is reflected in duplicate. For the portion that is unlikely to reach the limit value, it is possible to reduce the reduction amount of the reflection ratio by giving priority to reflecting the content of the image data of each individual image in duplicate.

Feature E3. The image data has a plurality of unit image data (pixels 122) associated with numerical information that defines color information.
The reflection reducing means is characterized in that the reflection ratio of the image data to be reduced is reduced by the reduction amount of the reflection ratio according to each of the numerical information of the unit image data included in the reduction amount reference image data. Features The gaming machine according to E1 or E2.

According to the feature E3, since it is possible to adjust the reduction amount of the reflection ratio in units of unit image data, it is possible to finely adjust the portion where the reduction of the reflection ratio is prioritized and the portion where the overlap reflection is prioritized. It will be possible.

Feature E4. The unit setting area has a configuration in which numerical information can be set within a range up to the limit value.
The image data has a plurality of unit image data associated with numerical information that defines color information within the range up to the limit value.
In the reflection reduction means, the unit image data sets a value obtained by dividing the color information of the unit image data included in the reduction amount reference image data from the limit value by the limit value. Described in any one of features E1 to E3, which is characterized in that the reflection ratio of the reduction target image data is reduced by integrating with the unit image data of the reduction target image data corresponding to the unit setting area. Game machine.

According to the feature E4, it is possible to reduce the reflection ratio according to the content of the reduction amount reference image data by using each image data itself to be duplicated and reflected. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while suppressing the data capacity for storing various data in advance.

Feature E5. The reduction target image data whose reflection ratio is reduced by using the reduction amount reference image data is the image data of the front side image data and the back side image data different from the reduction target image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that it is present.

According to the feature E5, it is possible to reduce the reflection ratio of the image data according to the content of the image data on the other side of the duplicate reflection.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the reduction amount reference image data is the front side image data, and the reduction target image data is the back side image data.

According to the feature E6, the back side image data can be reflected in a manner corresponding to the content of the front side individual image as compared with the configuration in which the reflection ratio of the back side image data is uniformly reduced, and the image data is duplicated. When reflecting, it is possible to make fine adjustments to further enhance the display effect.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features E1 to E6, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J2, Features K1 to K6, and Features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. An arrangement means for arranging object data which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of steps S2302 to S2304 in VDP135) and a viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (VDP135). The object data is projected onto the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the generated data (drawing data) is generated based on the projection data projected on the projection plane. A generation for storing generated data generated by a data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152) having a drawing setting means (a function of executing the process of steps S231 to S2312 in VDP135). Data storage means (frame buffer 142) and
A display control means (VDP135) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means on the display unit (display surface P) of the display means (design display device 41).
In a game machine equipped with
The data generation means is a gaming machine including a transparency value setting means (a function of executing the process of step S3815 in VDP135) for setting a transparency value corresponding to translucency with respect to the projection data.

According to the feature F1, since the transparency value corresponding to the translucency is set after the projection data is created, the semitransparent image can be finally displayed even if the object data is not in the translucent state. It will be possible. If you create projection data after making the object data semi-transparent, there is a possibility that the image part on the back side that you do not want to display as object data will be displayed, and if you try to create projection data while avoiding it The process may be complicated. On the other hand, since it is possible to finally display a semi-transparent image without making the object data semi-transparent, it is possible to preferably display the semi-transparent image. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform display control.

Feature F2. The data generation means makes the object data for displaying individual images (design display units CH16 to CH18) for which the transparency value corresponding to the translucency is set by the transparency value setting means semitransparently. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the corresponding transparency value is not set.

According to the feature F2, since the object data is not made semi-transparent, it is possible to prevent the image portion on the back side, which is originally not desired to be displayed as the object data, from being displayed. Further, since the configuration of the above feature F1 is provided and the transparency value corresponding to the translucency is set for the projection data, the semitransparent image is displayed while preventing the above-mentioned inconvenience. Is possible.

Feature F3. The data generation means
When displaying a plurality of individual images (effect character CH15, symbol display units CH16 to CH18), predetermined projection data corresponding to some of the individual images of the plurality of individual images is created, and separately, the plurality of individual images are described. Individual creation means (step S3802, step S3803, step S3805, step S3806, step S3808, step S3809, step S3811 in VDP135) for creating the specific projection data corresponding to the individual image not included in the predetermined projection data among the individual images. And the function to execute the process of step S3812) and
A generation execution means (a function of executing the process of step S3816 in VDP135) for setting the predetermined projection data in a mode corresponding to the transparency value in the storage area in which the specific projection data is set, and
The gaming machine according to the feature F1 or F2, characterized in that

According to feature F3, projection data is created multiple times, and a plurality of individual projection data are simply combined while setting a transparency value corresponding to translucency for some projection data. It is possible to display the images so as to overlap in the depth direction of the display unit and to reflect the contents of the overlapping portion of the individual images on the back side in the overlapping portion of the individual images on the front side.

Feature F4. The individual creation means
Processing of data creation means (step S3802, step S3805, step S3808 and step S3811 in VDP135) for sequentially creating each projection data including the predetermined projection data and the specific projection data in the projection data storage means (drawing buffer BF1). Function to execute) and
The processing of steps S3803, step S3806, step S3809 and step S3812 in VDP135 for writing the projection data created in the projection data storage means to the storage storage means (first to fourth storage buffers BF2 to BF5) is executed. Function) and
The gaming machine according to the feature F3, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature F4, in a configuration in which the generated data is generated by synthesizing the projection data after creating a plurality of projection data, the storage means to which the projection data is created can be aggregated in the projection data storage means. It becomes. As a result, it is not necessary to change the storage means of the creation destination when creating the projection data, so that the processing design can be facilitated. Further, since the projection data storage means is provided with a storage storage means for storing the created projection data, it is possible to separately store the created projection data until the time of synthesis execution.

Feature F5. The individual creation means creates each projection data including the predetermined projection data and the specific projection data in the projection data storage means (drawing buffer BF1).
The projection data storage means has a plurality of projection unit storage areas.
Each of these projection unit storage areas has a configuration in which color information and transparency value information can be set.
The individual creation means creates the predetermined projection data after setting the transparency value information corresponding to transparency as the transparency value information of each projection unit storage area in the projection data storage means, and displays the predetermined projection data in the predetermined projection data. The transparency value information corresponding to opacity is set as the transparency value information in the projection unit storage area where the data corresponding to the target individual image is written, and the transparency value information is set in the other projection unit storage areas. The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, wherein the information of the corresponding transparency value is maintained.

According to the feature F5, since the projection data is created in the projection data storage means after the transparency value information corresponding to the transparency is set in each projection unit area in the projection data storage means, the projection data It is possible to make the transparent value information of the portion where the individual image is not drawn transparent without executing post-processing after the projection data is created. As a result, even in a configuration in which the generated data is finally generated by simply superimposing a plurality of projection data, the data portion of the individual image to be projected in each projection data is overwritten by the blank data portion. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features F1 to F5, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J2, Features K1 to K6, and Features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. A display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P) and
A display storage means (memory module 74) that stores image data in advance, and
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP76) for displaying an image on the display unit using image data stored in the display storage means, and
With
The display storage means includes the first predetermined image data (normal effect image data ED5) and the first predetermined image data as image data for displaying the predetermined image (effect image EG6 for increasing time). The second predetermined image data (image data ED6 for simple effect) in which the resolution is set low is stored.
The display control means enlarges the second predetermined image data so that the predetermined image is displayed in the same size as when the first predetermined image data is used even when the second predetermined image data is used. A gaming machine characterized by having an image enlarging means (a function of executing the process of step S2109 in VDP76).

According to the feature G1, not only the first predetermined image data but also the second predetermined image data whose resolution is set lower than that of the first predetermined image data is stored as the image data for displaying the predetermined image. Then, when the second predetermined image data is used, the second predetermined image data is enlarged and used so that the predetermined image is displayed in the same size as when the first predetermined image data is used. As a result, the first predetermined image data is used when the predetermined image is displayed in a state of high image quality, and the second is when it is necessary to shorten the time required for reading the image data even if the image quality is deteriorated. It becomes possible to use predetermined image data. Therefore, it is possible to set data for displaying a predetermined image in a mode according to the situation, and it is possible to preferably perform display control.

Feature G2. It is necessary for the image enlarging means to enlarge the second predetermined image data rather than the difference between the processing time required for reading the first predetermined image data and the processing time required for reading the second predetermined image data. The gaming machine according to feature G1, which is characterized in that the processing time is shorter.

According to the feature G2, it is possible to make the processing time when the second predetermined image data is read out and enlarged and then used shorter than the processing time when the first predetermined image data is read out and used. As a result, by intentionally using the second predetermined image data in a situation where the processing load is large, it is possible to display the predetermined image even in a situation where the processing load is large.

Feature G3. The image enlarging means stores the enlarged image data after enlarging the second predetermined image data in a predetermined storage means (expansion buffer 81).
The feature G1 or the display control means is characterized by using the enlarged image data stored in the predetermined storage means during the period of displaying the predetermined image by using the second predetermined image data. The gaming machine described in G2.

According to the feature G3, after the second predetermined image data is enlarged, the enlarged image data is stored and held in the predetermined storage means, so that the processing when the second predetermined image data is used over a plurality of update timings. It is possible to reduce the load.

Feature G4. The display control means uses the first predetermined image data from the state of using the enlarged image data of the second predetermined image data after being enlarged by the image enlargement means as the image data for displaying the predetermined image. Any of the features G1 to G3 characterized in that it is provided with a usage target setting means (a function of executing the process of steps S2015 to S2020 in the display CPU 72, a function of executing the process of step S2111 in the VDP76). The game machine described in 1.

According to the feature G4, it is possible to switch from the situation where the second predetermined image data is used to reduce the processing load to the situation where the first predetermined image data is used to improve the image quality while continuing the display of the predetermined image. It becomes.

Feature G5. When the use target setting means starts displaying the predetermined image at a timing when the number of individual images displayed on the display unit increases, the enlarged image data is used as image data for displaying the predetermined image. The gaming machine according to feature G4, wherein the image data for displaying the predetermined image is subsequently switched to the first predetermined image data.

According to the feature G5, when the display of a predetermined image is to be started at the timing when the number of individual images increases, the time required for reading the image data at that timing may be locally lengthened. In terms of timing, by displaying the predetermined image using the enlarged image data after enlarging the second predetermined image data, it is possible to suppress a long time required for the reading. On the other hand, by using the first predetermined image data after the timing, it is possible to read the first predetermined image data and improve the image quality of the predetermined image in a situation where the time required for reading the image data is sufficient. It becomes.

Feature G6. When the display control means displays the predetermined image using the first predetermined image data, the display mode of the predetermined image is changed by using different first predetermined image data at a plurality of update timings. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein when the predetermined image is displayed using the second predetermined image data, the display mode of the predetermined image is not changed.

According to the feature G6, when a predetermined image is displayed using the first predetermined image data, the display contents can be prevented from being standardized by changing the display mode of the predetermined image. When displaying a predetermined image using the second predetermined image data, it is possible to prioritize the reduction of the processing load.

Feature G7. A plurality of the first predetermined image data are provided so that the display mode of the predetermined image can be changed over a plurality of update timings, and only one of the second predetermined image data is provided. Characteristic The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6.

According to the feature G7, the display mode of the predetermined image can be changed by providing a plurality of the first predetermined image data, but only one second predetermined image data is provided, so that the second predetermined image data is provided. It is possible to simplify the processing configuration when displaying a predetermined image by using the predetermined image data.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features G1 to G7, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J2, Features K1 to K6, and Features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. A display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P) and
An image is displayed on the display unit using the generated data (drawing data) generated by the data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152), and the content of the image is updated at the update timing. Display control means (VDP135) and
With
The data generation means is in a situation where a plurality of individual images including a first specific individual image (A character CH8 for loop effect) and a second specific individual image (B character CH9 for loop effect) are displayed on the display unit. In order to derive the first display information (coordinate data) necessary for changing the display mode of the first specific individual image, the execution of the information derivation process (process for interpolating display period) is started, and the second specification It is provided with a derivation process execution means (a function of executing an interpolation display period process in the display CPU 131) that starts execution of the information derivation process in order to derive the second display information necessary for changing the display mode of the individual image.
The derivation processing execution means derives predetermined display information which is one of the first display information and the second display information when the period from one update timing to the next update timing is set as a specific period. The execution of the information derivation process is started in a predetermined specific period, and the execution of the information derivation process for deriving the specific display information which is the other of the first display information and the second display information is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that it starts in the specific period after the specific period.

According to the feature H1, in a situation where a plurality of individual images including the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image are displayed on the display unit, the display mode of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image is When it is changed, the start of derivation of the first display information necessary for changing the display mode and the start of derivation of the second display information are performed in different specific periods. As a result, the event that the processing load becomes extremely high in one specific period does not occur as compared with the configuration in which the derivation start of the first display information and the derivation start of the second display information are performed in the same specific period. It becomes possible to. Therefore, it is possible to preferably change the display mode of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image, and it is possible to preferably perform display control.

Feature H2. The game according to feature H1, wherein the derivation process execution means starts execution of the information derivation process for deriving the specific display information in the next specific period with respect to the predetermined specific period. Machine.

According to the feature H2, an event occurs in which the processing load becomes extremely high in one specific period while minimizing the deviation between the derivation start timing of the first display information and the derivation start timing of the second display information. It is possible to prevent it.

Feature H3. When the display control means starts executing the information derivation process for deriving the predetermined display information, even if the execution of the information derivation process for deriving the specific display information is not started, the display control means does not start executing the information derivation process. The game according to feature H1 or H2, wherein a display using the predetermined display information is started on the side of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image to be used for the predetermined display information. Machine.

According to the feature H3, even if the derivation start timing of the first display information and the derivation start timing of the second display information are intentionally shifted, the display mode of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image is displayed. It is possible to start the change of.

Feature H4. In the display control means, the first specific individual image displays the first specific operation (interpolated display of the loop effect A character CH8) following the first predetermined operation display (first loop effect mode of the loop effect A character CH8). A mode of the period) is performed, and the second specific individual image displays the second specific operation (the first loop effect mode of the loop effect B character CH9) followed by the second specific operation display (loop effect B character CH9). Update the content of the image to perform the interpolation display period mode)
The features H1 to H3 are characterized in that the first display information is information for causing the first specific operation display, and the second display information is information for causing the second specific operation display. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature H4, even if the start timing of the specific operation display of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image is shifted by shifting the specific period for starting the derivation of each display information, the first specific individual image and the first specific individual image and Since each of the second specific individual images has a configuration in which the specific motion display is performed following the predetermined motion display, it is possible for the player to recognize that the content of the deviation is also a series of motion display contents. Therefore, it is possible to distribute the processing load while not giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Feature H5. The operation mode of the first specific individual image and the operation mode of the second specific individual image at the timing of starting the execution of the information derivation process for deriving the predetermined display information are different from each other. Feature The gaming machine described in H4.

According to the feature H5, even if the start timing of the specific operation display of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image is shifted by shifting the specific period for starting the derivation of each display information, the information derivation process is executed. Since the operation mode of the first specific individual image and the operation mode of the second specific individual image at the start timing are different, the deviation of the start timing becomes inconspicuous due to the difference in the operation mode. Therefore, it is possible to distribute the processing load while not giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Feature H6. The operation mode of the first specific individual image at the timing when the first predetermined operation display ends is a predetermined mode, and the operation mode of the second specific individual image at the timing when the second predetermined operation display ends is It is a predetermined mode,
The gaming machine according to feature H4 or H5, wherein the predetermined display information is the first display information, and the specific display information is the second display information.

According to the feature H6, since it is predetermined from which of the first display information and the second display information the information derivation process is started, the target for starting the information derivation process first is changed according to the situation. The processing configuration can be simplified in that there is no need to do so. Further, since the operation mode of each specific individual image at the timing when the predetermined operation display ends is defined, it is predetermined from which of the first display information and the second display information the information derivation process is started. Even so, it is possible to prevent the player who visually recognizes the displayed content from feeling uncomfortable.

Feature H7. Based on the occurrence of a switching trigger that occurs irregularly in a situation where the first specific individual image is performing the first predetermined operation display and the second specific individual image is performing the second predetermined operation display. The configuration is such that the first specific operation display and the second specific operation display are started.
The derivation process execution means is a pre-start determination means (display) that determines a target for first starting the information derivation process among the first display information and the second display information according to the timing at which the switching trigger occurs. The gaming machine according to feature H4 or H5, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S2702 in the CPU 131).

According to the feature H7, since the switching trigger from the situation in which the predetermined operation is displayed to the situation in which the specific operation is displayed is irregularly generated, the display contents can be diversified. In this case, since it is determined from which of the first display information and the second display information the information derivation process is started according to the timing at which the switching trigger occurs, the information is specified in an order that does not give the player a sense of discomfort. It is possible to start the operation display.

Feature H8. The data generation means
Means for deriving information for causing the first specific individual image to perform the first predetermined motion display according to the first predetermined motion information (first animation data AD1 for A character) stored in advance (step in the display CPU 131). Function to execute the processing of S2407) and
According to the first special motion information (second animation data AD2 for A character) stored in advance, the first special motion display (second loop effect mode of A character CH8 for loop effect) is performed on the first specific individual image. Means for deriving information for displaying (a function of executing the process of step S2407 in the display CPU 131) and
Means for deriving information for causing the second specific individual image to perform the second predetermined operation display according to the second predetermined operation information (first animation data AD3 for the B character) stored in advance (step in the display CPU 131). Function to execute the processing of S2407) and
According to the second special motion information (second animation data AD4 for the B character) stored in advance, the second special motion display (second loop effect mode of the loop effect B character CH9) is performed on the second specific individual image. Means for deriving information for displaying (a function of executing the process of step S2407 in the display CPU 131) and
With
The first specific operation display is performed after the first predetermined operation display is performed and before the first special operation display is performed.
The second specific operation display is performed after the second predetermined operation display is performed and before the second special operation display is performed.
The derivation process execution means derives the first display information by executing the information derivation process using the first predetermined operation information and the first special operation information, and obtains the second predetermined operation information. The gaming machine according to any one of features H4 to H7, characterized in that the second display information is derived by executing the information derivation process using the second special operation information.

According to the feature H8, the specific operation display is performed between each predetermined operation display and each special operation display based on the predetermined operation information stored in advance and the information derived by using the special operation information. While suppressing the amount of information required to store information in advance, it is possible to smoothly change the display content from the state in which the predetermined operation display is performed to the state in which the special operation display is performed. However, if the process of deriving the display information using the predetermined operation information and the special operation information is collectively performed in one specific period, the processing load may become extremely large. Since the display information is derived in a specific period different from that of the first specific individual image and the second specific individual image, the processing load can be distributed.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features H1 to H8, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J2, Features K1 to K6, and Features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. A display means (design display device 41) having a display unit (display surface P) and
Display control means (VDP135) for displaying an image on the display unit using the generated data (drawing data) generated by the data generation means (display CPU 131, geometry calculation unit 151, and rendering unit 152).
With
The data generation means reads out from the display storage means (memory module 133) and uses color-defined image data (background texture data GTD1) having a plurality of unit data associated with numerical information that defines color information. The generated data is generated by
The display storage means stores in advance adjustment data (first refraction texture data GTD2, second refraction texture data GTD3) having a plurality of the unit data as well as the color-defined image data.
The data generation means uses the numerical information derived from the unit data of the adjustment data as predetermined adjustment information different from the color information, so that the corresponding individual image displayed using the color-defined image data can be used. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes content adjusting means for adjusting display contents (a function of executing the processes of steps S4103 to S4107 in VDP135).

According to the feature I1, since the display content of the corresponding individual image is adjusted by using the predetermined adjustment information, it is possible to diversify the display content while using the same color-defined image data. In this case, the predetermined adjustment information is derived by using the adjustment data having a plurality of unit data as in the color-defined image data. This makes it possible to adjust the display content of the corresponding individual image by using the adjustment data stored in the display storage means as data similar to the color-defined image data, and the color-defined image data is a data format. Compared to a configuration in which adjustment data is prepared as different data, it is possible to adjust the display content of the corresponding individual image while standardizing the processing for reading the data and the processing for temporary storage after reading. .. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform display control.

Feature I2. The unit data has a plurality of base color corresponding data (R value, G value, B value) corresponding to the base color.
The content adjusting means has the feature I1 characterized in that the predetermined adjustment information is specified by using the numerical information derived from the plurality of base color corresponding data set in the unit data of the adjustment data. The game machine described.

According to the feature I2, the content of the predetermined adjustment information can be finely controlled by deriving the predetermined adjustment information by using the plurality of base color correspondence information set in the unit data of the adjustment data. ..

Feature I3. The unit data has a plurality of base color corresponding data (R value, G value, B value) corresponding to the base color.
The content adjusting means specifies the predetermined adjustment information by using numerical information derived from a part of a plurality of base color corresponding data set in the unit data of the adjustment data. The gaming machine according to the feature I1 or I2.

According to the feature I3, all the base color corresponding data are used by deriving the predetermined adjustment information by using a part of the plurality of base color corresponding data set as the unit data of the adjustment data. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for deriving the predetermined adjustment information as compared with the configuration for deriving the predetermined adjustment information.

Feature I4. The data generation means
An arrangement means for arranging object data which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of steps S2302 to S2304 in VDP135) and
A viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the process of step S2306 in VDP135) and
The drawing setting means (processes S231 to S2312 in VDP135) for projecting the object data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and generating generated data based on the data projected on the projection plane are executed. Function to do) and
Have,
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the color-defined image data is texture data set for the object data.

According to the feature I4, it is possible to derive predetermined adjustment information by using the adjustment data prepared as the texture data.

Feature I5. The game according to feature I4, wherein the content adjusting means does not adjust the content of the object data by using the predetermined adjustment information, but adjusts the content of the unit data in the texture data. Machine.

According to the feature I5, the content of the object data is not adjusted by using the predetermined adjustment information, but the content of the unit data in the texture data is adjusted. Therefore, the adjustment target is not three-dimensional information but two-dimensional. It can be used as information, and the processing load for making adjustments can be reduced.

Feature I6. The gaming machine according to feature I5, wherein the content adjusting means adjusts the content of the texture data by using the predetermined adjustment information in a state before being set in the object data.

According to the feature I6, since it is possible to perform the adjustment using the predetermined adjustment information without being affected by the data state after the texture data is set as the object data, the adjustment can be easily performed.

Feature I7. The content adjusting means has one of the features I1 to I6 characterized in that the distortion display of the corresponding individual image displayed by using the color-defined image data is performed by using the predetermined adjustment information. Described game machine.

According to the feature I7, it is possible to display the distortion of the corresponding individual image by using the adjustment data stored in the display storage means as the same data as the color-defined image data.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of features I1 to I7, features A1 to A9, features B1 to B6, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D7, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F5, and features G1 to G7. , Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J2, Features K1 to K6, and Features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. An arrangement means for arranging object data which is three-dimensional information in a virtual three-dimensional space (a function of executing the processing of steps S2302 to S2304 in VDP135) and a viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (VDP135). The object data is projected onto the projection plane set based on the viewpoint, and the generated data (drawing data) is generated based on the data projected on the projection plane. A drawing setting means (a function of executing the process of steps S231 to S2312 in VDP135), a generated data storage means (frame buffer 142) for storing generated data generated by the data generating means having the drawing setting means, and a generated data storage means (frame buffer 142).
A display control means (VDP135) for displaying an image corresponding to the generated data stored in the generated data storage means on the display means (design display device 41), and
In a game machine equipped with
The data generation means does not adjust the contents of the object data (background plate-shaped object data GSD) based on the predetermined adjustment information, but the texture data set for the object data (background texture data GTD1). By adjusting the content of the above based on the predetermined adjustment information, the content adjusting means for adjusting the display content of the corresponding individual image displayed using the object data and the texture data (processing of steps S4103 to S4107 in VDP135 is executed. A game machine characterized by having a function to play data.

According to the feature J1, the content of the object data is not adjusted by using the predetermined adjustment information, but the content of the unit data in the texture data is adjusted. Therefore, the adjustment target is not three-dimensional information but two-dimensional. It can be used as information, and the processing load for making adjustments can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform display control.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the content adjusting means adjusts the content of the texture data by using the predetermined adjustment information in a state before being set in the object data.

According to the feature J2, since it is possible to perform the adjustment using the predetermined adjustment information without being affected by the data state after the texture data is set as the object data, the adjustment becomes easy.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features J1 to J2, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J2, Features K1 to K6, and Features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The inventions of the feature A group to the feature J group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. As these game machines, those provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. The first control means (sound-light side MPU62) that determines the execution content of the effect,
A second control means (display CPU 72) that controls the effect executing means (design display device 41) based on the transmission information transmitted by the first control means, and
With
When a predetermined execution trigger occurs, the trigger response effect (notice display) is executed by the effect execution means.
The trigger response effect has a plurality of effect elements (contents of the second type) in which the content to be changed, which is at least one of the execution presence / absence and the content, changes.
The execution pattern of the trigger response effect differs depending on the combination pattern of the variable target contents for the plurality of effect elements.
When the first control means transmits transmission information for executing the trigger response effect, the corresponding transmission information (first command data CD1, second command data CD2) corresponding to the variation target content of a predetermined effect element is transmitted. , 3rd command data CD3) and the corresponding transmission information (1st command data CD1, 2nd command data CD2, 3rd command data CD3) corresponding to the variable target contents of other production elements are transmitted separately. A gaming machine characterized by having a transmission means (a function of executing a command selection process in the sound and light side MPU 62).

According to the feature K1, since the execution pattern of the trigger response effect differs depending on the combination pattern of the variable target contents for the plurality of effect elements, it is possible to diversify the effect contents of the trigger response effect. In this case, since the first corresponding transmission information corresponding to the variable target content of the predetermined effect element and the second corresponding transmission information corresponding to the variable target content of the other effect element are transmitted separately. Even when the number of effect elements is increased or decreased or the content to be changed is changed, the corresponding transmission information can be changed in units of the corresponding effect elements, so that the design of the transmission information can be facilitated. ..

Feature K2. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein each of the predetermined effect element and the other effect elements determines the effect content to be executed at the same time.

According to the feature K2, even if there are a plurality of effect elements that determine the effect contents to be executed at the same time, the corresponding transmission information for causing the second control means to specify the variable target content of the effect elements is for each type of effect element. Since it is configured to be transmitted to, the design of transmission information can be facilitated.

Feature K3. The first control means transmits end transmission information (end command) indicating that all of the corresponding transmission information necessary for executing the trigger response effect has been transmitted (step S509 in the sound / light side MPU 62). The gaming machine according to the feature K1 or K2, which is characterized by having a function of executing the processing of the above.

According to the feature K3, in the configuration in which the corresponding transmission information is transmitted in units of the effect elements, the end transmission information is transmitted when all the corresponding transmission information necessary for executing the trigger response effect is transmitted. It is possible to make the second control means recognize that the transmission of all the corresponding transmission information necessary for executing the trigger response effect is completed without fixing the number of effect elements included in the trigger response effect. Become.

Features K4. The second control means
A storage execution means (a function for executing command interrupt processing in the display CPU 72) for storing the received corresponding transmission information in the information storage means (command storage buffer 101), and
Reference information for setting reference information (execution target table) used for executing the trigger response effect corresponding to a plurality of corresponding transmission information stored in the information storage means when the end transmission information is received. Setting means (function to execute command correspondence processing in display CPU 72) and
The gaming machine according to the feature K3, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature K4, the second control means has a configuration in which the reference information used for executing the trigger response effect is set after receiving all the corresponding transmission information necessary for executing the trigger response effect. , It is possible to set one reference information corresponding to all of the variable target contents of all the effect elements, instead of setting the reference information corresponding to each of the variable target contents of the effect element.

Feature K5. The corresponding transmission information includes the outline information (first command data CD1) for specifying the outline contents of the effect element corresponding to the corresponding transmission information, and the branch contents included in the outline contents corresponding to the outline information. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, which includes branch information (second command data CD2, third command data CD3) for specifying which of the two to be executed.

According to the feature K5, since the one correspondence transmission information is also divided into the outline information and the branch information, the design of the one correspondence transmission information can be facilitated.

Feature K6. The gaming machine according to feature K5, wherein the second control means grasps different contents from the branch information depending on the contents of the outline information even if the contents of the same branch information are the same.

According to the feature K6, since the branch information is commonly used among the plurality of corresponding transmission information, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity required for storing the transmission correspondence information in advance.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features K1 to K6, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J2, Features K1 to K6, and Features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The invention of the above-mentioned feature K group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. In these game machines, it is known that a command transmitted from one control means is used to execute control corresponding to the command by another control means.

For example, in a pachinko machine, the execution control of the effect is performed by the control means for the effect based on the command transmitted from the main control means for controlling the progress of the game, or the control means for the effect is transmitted. It is known that the execution control of the production is performed by other control means for the production based on the command.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, it is necessary to optimize the configuration of transmission information transmitted from one control means to another control means in order to execute the effect, and this point is still considered. There is room for improvement.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. Arithmetic execution means (function to execute task processing in the display CPU 72) that starts arithmetic processing using arithmetic information (execution target table) when a start trigger occurs, and
A result utilization means (a function of executing the process of step S609 in the display CPU 72, VDP76) for executing a specific process using the calculation result of the calculation process, and
With
When the end condition is satisfied in the middle of the calculation process in the predetermined execution time and the calculation process is terminated in the middle of the calculation processing, the calculation execution means is said to be the predetermined in the next execution time with respect to the predetermined execution time. It is provided with a re-execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S606, S610, and S916 in the display CPU 72) for executing the calculation process using the calculation information set as the usage target in the execution time. A game machine characterized by being.

According to the feature L1, if the end condition is satisfied in the middle of the arithmetic processing, the arithmetic processing is terminated in the middle, so that the processing time of the arithmetic processing fluctuates and the execution of other processing is greatly restricted. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the event of being done. In addition, when the arithmetic processing is terminated in the middle, in the arithmetic processing of the next execution time, the arithmetic processing using the arithmetic information used in the arithmetic processing terminated in the middle is executed again. As a result, even if the arithmetic processing can be terminated in the middle, it is possible to complete the execution of the arithmetic processing using each arithmetic information.

Feature L2. The game according to feature L1, wherein the re-execution means restarts the arithmetic processing from the content in the middle of ending at the predetermined execution time in the next execution time with respect to the predetermined execution time. Machine.

According to the feature L2, when the arithmetic processing using the arithmetic information used in the previous execution round is executed again, the arithmetic processing is restarted from the content in the middle of the end in the previous execution round. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required to end the restarted arithmetic processing in the new execution times.

Feature L3. The arithmetic processing includes a plurality of types of individual arithmetic processing (step S902, step S903, step S906, step S909, step S912-step S914), and the plurality of types of individual arithmetic processing are sequentially executed at each execution time of the arithmetic processing. It is a target configuration,
The gaming machine according to feature L2, wherein the arithmetic execution means terminates the arithmetic processing this time after the completion of the individual arithmetic processing even if the condition for termination is satisfied during the execution of the individual arithmetic processing. ..

According to the feature L3, even if the arithmetic processing is terminated in the middle, it is not terminated in the middle of the individual arithmetic processing, so that the information setting processing for restarting the arithmetic processing from the middle is complicated. It becomes possible to suppress it.

Feature L4. The arithmetic processing is executed as a part of the periodic processing (V interrupt processing) in which the execution condition is periodically satisfied.
The game according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the calculation execution means terminates the calculation process in the middle of the calculation process by satisfying the execution condition as the end condition in the middle of the calculation process. Machine.

According to the feature L4, it is possible to complete the execution of the arithmetic processing using each arithmetic information while ensuring the periodic execution of the periodic processing.

Feature L5. If a priority event (a set of execution target tables for notification) occurs even when the calculation process is terminated in the middle of the predetermined execution times, the calculation execution means is determined. In the next execution time with respect to the execution time, the calculation using the calculation information corresponding to the priority event is not used, instead of using the calculation information set as the usage target in the predetermined execution time. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, characterized in that processing is executed.

According to the feature L5, the execution of the arithmetic processing using the arithmetic information corresponding to the priority event is prioritized over the restart of the arithmetic processing using the arithmetic information in the arithmetic processing ended in the middle, so that the priority event It is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while not delaying the execution of the arithmetic processing using the arithmetic information corresponding to.

Feature L6. The specific control means having the arithmetic execution means transmits the re-execution correspondence information (delay command) when the re-execution of the arithmetic processing is set by the re-execution means (display). The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S611 in the CPU 72).

According to the feature L6, when the arithmetic processing in a predetermined execution time is terminated in the middle and the arithmetic processing is executed again in the next execution time, the re-execution correspondence information is transmitted, so that the specific control means It is possible to make an operation other than the above correspond to the re-execution of the arithmetic processing.

Feature L7. A predetermined control means (sound light side MPU 62) is provided separately from the specific control means.
When the predetermined control means receives the re-execution correspondence information, the predetermined control means is provided with a processing adjustment means (a function of executing a display side command correspondence process in the sound / light side MPU 62) for adjusting the execution content of the predetermined process. The gaming machine according to the feature L6.

According to the feature L7, when the arithmetic processing is re-executed, the execution content of the predetermined processing in the predetermined control means is adjusted, so that the processing content of the specific processing can be made to correspond to the processing content of the predetermined processing. It becomes.

Feature L8. As the specific process, the result utilization means controls the execution of the effect in the specific effect execution means (symbol display device 41) by using the calculation result of the arithmetic process.
The gaming machine according to feature L7, wherein the predetermined control means controls the execution of the effect in the predetermined effect execution means (display / light emitting unit 44, speaker unit 45) as the predetermined process.

According to the feature L8, when the derivation of the calculation result is delayed in the arithmetic processing executed to control the execution of the effect in the specific effect executing means, it is executed to control the execution of the effect in the predetermined effect executing means. Since the processing content of the predetermined processing to be performed is also adjusted, it is possible to make the content of the effect in each effect executing means correspond to each other.

Feature L9. When the end condition is satisfied in the middle of the calculation process in the predetermined execution times and the calculation process is terminated in the middle, the result utilization means performs the calculation in the execution times before the predetermined execution times. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L8, characterized in that the specific processing is executed by using the calculation result of the processing.

According to the feature L9, when the calculation process is terminated in the middle, the specific process is not executed by using the contents in the middle of the calculation, but the calculation result of the calculation process completed before that. Since the specific process is executed by using the above, it is possible to prevent the executed content of the specific process from becoming abnormal.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of any one of the features L1 to L9, the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B6, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F5, and the features G1 to G7. , Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I7, Features J1 to J2, Features K1 to K6, and Features L1 to L9 may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

The invention of the above-mentioned feature L group can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as a type of game machine. These game machines are provided with control means in which a CPU is mounted and elements such as a memory in which a control program is stored are mounted, and the game is performed by executing arithmetic processing in the control means. Controls are being made to make this possible. It is also known that the CPU and the memory are not individually mounted on the control means, but are mounted on the control means in an integrated state.

Here, in a game machine such as the above example, there is a demand for a configuration capable of suitably executing arithmetic processing in a control means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating game machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, the variable display of the plurality of pictures is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and is caused by the operation of the stop operation means. A gaming machine in which the variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a privilege is given to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 41 ... Design display device, 44 ... Display light emitting unit, 45 ... Speaker unit, 62 ... Sound / light side MPU, 72 ... Display CPU, 74 ... Memory module, 76 ... VDP, 81 ... Expansion buffer, 82 ... Frame buffer, 93 ... Video decoder, 101 ... Command storage buffer, 121 ... Unit area, 122 ... Pixel, 131 ... Display CPU, 133 ... Memory module, 135 ... VDP, 142 ... Frame buffer, 151 ... Geometry calculation unit, 152 ... Rendering unit 169 ... Coordinate calculation area, ABD1 to ABD50 ... Bone data, AD1 to AD4 ... Animation data, BF1 ... Drawing buffer, BF2 to BF5 ... Storage buffer, BG ... Ground image, BGD ... Ground object data , BMD ... Base video data, BOD1 to BOD50 ... Bone data, BSD ... Plate-shaped object data for plane shadow, BST1 ... Texture data for first plane shadow, BST2 ... Texture data for second plane shadow, BTD1 ... Texture data, BTD2 ... Assembly texture data, CD1 to CD3 ... Command data, CH1 ... Color change effect character, CH2 ... Effect effect character, CH8 ... Loop effect A character, CH9 ... Loop effect B character, CH10 ... Bone display character , CH11 ... Production character, CH12 ... Shadow image, CH13 ... Production character, CH14 ... Shadow image, CH15 ... Production character, CH16 to CH18 ... Design display unit, CHG1 to CHG5 ... Group unit character, CR ... Color change target Area, ED5 ... Normal effect image data, ED6 ... Simple effect image data, EG2 ... Effect image, EG6 ... Increase effect image, FRD1 ... Skeletal data, FRD2 ... Aggregate skeleton data, GSD ... Background plate-like object Data, GTD1 ... Background texture data, GTD2, GTD3 ... Refraction texture data, P ... Display surface, PD1-PD3 ... Parts image data, SG ... Stairs image, SGD ... Stairs object data, SKD1 ... Skin data, SKD2 ... Skin data for gathering, SSD ... Plate-shaped object data for step shadow.

Claims (1)

A display means having a display unit and
A display control means for displaying an image on the display unit using the generated data generated by the data generation means, and
With
The data generation means includes information deriving means for deriving control information used for generating the generated data.
The information derivation means is
Pre-derivation setting means that sets the derivation storage means to the pre-derivative state,
A derivation execution means for deriving the control information by using the derivation storage means set in the pre-derivation state,
With
The setting to the pre-derivation state by the pre-derivation setting means is a configuration that can be executed a plurality of times to generate the generated data at the update timing of one image.
The derivation execution means is the control corresponding to a plurality of types of individual images after the pre-derivation state is set by the pre-derivation setting means and before the pre-derivation state is newly set. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with multiple correspondence derivation means for deriving information.

Images